<>-^JifiM 
 
 ^ 
 
 Ltt^ 
 
 MUNTinaTON COLL»CTI»« 
 
 Columte ®nibersiitp 
 in tfje Citp of ^eto |9orfe 
 
 College o! $i)pfiiictan£( anb ^urgeonsf 
 
 Hibrarp 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 
 in 2010 with funding from 
 
 Open Knowledge Commons 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/artofdissectinghOOIyse 
 
THE 
 
 A 
 
 _ O F 
 
 SSECTING 
 
 THE 
 
 HUMAN BO DY, 
 
 I N A 
 
 rlaln, Eafy, and Compendious Method. 
 
 r WIT u 
 
 The feveral Inftruments neceffary, curiouOy en- 
 graved ; wherein all the different Parts of the 
 Human Body are defcribed, but particularly 
 the MUSCLES, in a full and accurate 
 iManner, and their Ufes clearly explained. 
 
 TranHated from the Latin of LYSER US. 
 By G. T H O M S O N, M. D. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 Printed for Joseph Davidson, at the y/;;?-^/, 
 in the Pouh'n. MDCCXL. 
 
5^#<^ 
 
 ^f¥f 
 
 J-/ 
 
 /: W "- 
 
(iii) 
 
 THE 
 
 -k— /a 
 
 E have only Pwo JFays of 
 coming at the Knozvkdge of 
 a Machine, either to be tan^ht the 
 ^hoJe Contrivance hy the Maker ^ or 
 to take it intirely to Pieces j and exa» 
 mine what each Part -is capable of in 
 a feparatedj and. in an united State ^ 
 But the Generality -of Enquirers into 
 the human St ru^ure^ have thous'kt that 
 they had better take their Knowledge of 
 it from Books or Plates^ than be at the 
 Pains to examine thoroughly with the 
 Kfiife. Chemifry has^ in all y^ges^, 
 found Private Men ^ and even Princes ^^ 
 very ready to ereSi Laboratories , but 
 few have purfued Anatomy^ that mofl 
 noble y valuable y and ujeful Scienccp^ 
 A. 2 witt): 
 
iv The PREFACE. 
 
 zv/^b er^ual Ardour ^ till "very lately* 
 This Negleci was owing to jome Dtf- 
 Je^iors^ <voho^ being willing to conceal 
 their Ignorance ^ rejled fatisfied witky 
 and demonftrated onlj/^ what the An- 
 tients had done before them \ and that 
 they might appear compleat Majlers 
 of this Science J never had the Since- 
 rity to own that any Part fill re- 
 mained to be known. The IForks of 
 our Predeceffors contain very fine Ex- 
 periments * but they would have de-^ 
 ferved a great deal' more Commenda- 
 tion^ and been more ufefil to thofe 
 who diffeui^ had they carried their a^ 
 natomical Encheire/is to a g-reater 
 Lengthy the Knowledge whereof is 
 the be ft IntroduBion to the ?jicer Parts 
 of Anatomy y on which that of the 
 animal OEco?wmy chief y depends. 
 
 Hence we may fee^ that a Perfon 
 '"ivho would be throughly acquainted 
 
 with 
 
The PREFACE. v 
 
 ^J)tth Anatomy, ought not to he a co?i^ 
 
 Un?Aal Spe^ator, but take hold of 
 
 the Knife, in order to fatisfy him^ 
 
 felf and convince others. For the 
 
 JfJlftance of fnch as incline to. 
 
 make themfehes Mafters of this curi^ 
 
 Otis Art, ^ our Author has laid down 
 
 mojl plain, eafy, and compendious 
 
 Rules, of whom the learned Br. Boer^ 
 
 haaye, in his Method offudying Fhy^ 
 
 Jck, gives this great Chara5ler. 
 
 "- M. Lyserus travelled almoft 
 '' over all Europe, and was efteemed 
 " the greateft Mailer ofdlffeaing Bo- 
 " dies wherever he went ; I would 
 " therefore advife every Student to 
 " read his Book on that SubjecJ:, in 
 " which he teaches how to prepare 
 '' and preferve the different Parts of 
 '^ the human Body, and to diffeS: fa 
 " exaaiy, that in the Operations one. 
 " Mufcle may not hind^^r the Diffec- 
 ^^ tion of another.'^ 
 A 5: 
 
vi The PREFACE. 
 
 Bv obfer-vi-Kir our Authors Rules j 
 
 one may acquire a thorough Kno^kdg^ 
 of the human Body] and I mufi jay,, 
 I camnot help wondring at thofe avho 
 take upo?2 them to reBlfy the Body 
 rjohen out of Order, and at the fame 
 Time know notVmg of the curious Con- 
 trivance of its Parts J which makes it 
 impofflble for them to know when, or 
 how to apply a proper Remedy. JVhen 
 human Bodies cannot he had, we ought 
 to exercife ourfehes with, Anmals ; 
 for by them we may learn to know the 
 Parts, how to difeB, trepan, or per-- 
 form any other chirurgical Operation^ 
 ^re may likewife make different Ex- 
 rjyeriments without opefiing the Crani- 
 um, by applying Medicines external- 
 ly^ by mixing them with the Food, 
 'and by Injections into the Veffels, in 
 order to difover what dijiurbs the a-- 
 nimal .^ciions, and what is mqft pro- 
 per to re/lore them when difordered, 
 ^ CON" 
 
( ^ii ) 
 
 CON TENTS^ 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 SECT. I. 
 
 OF the SubjeB of Anatomy Page i 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 Of the dijjeSiing Inftniments $ 
 
 SECT. III. 
 Some general Rules to be ohfewed in dijec- 
 ting 9 
 
 BOOK IL 
 
 Of the Abdomen or Region of the Belly. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Adminijiration of the Cuticula, Cutis, 
 Pinguedo, and the Memhrana Carnofa ly 
 Of the Cuticuk ^^ 
 
 Of the Cutis ^9 
 
 Of the Pinguedo 23 
 
 Of the Membrana Adipofa 24 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 Of the Method of difJeBing the abdominal 
 Mujcks 25 
 
 Of 
 
vrn CONTENTS, 
 
 Of the Mufculi Obliqui Defcendentes 2,6 
 
 Of the il fitfculi Obliqui Afcendentes 28 
 
 Of the Mufculi Pyramidaks 20 
 Of the Miifculi Real 
 
 Of the Mufcidi Tranfuerfah ^ \ 
 
 CHAP. HI. 
 
 Of the Peritoncsum and Omentum n. 
 Of the Peritonceum 
 
 Of the Omentum ■ 
 
 CHAP. IV. ^^ 
 Of the Stomach, Intejiines, and Mef enter y 1^6 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the LaBeals 
 
 4Q 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the Pancreas and Spleen 
 
 Of the Pancreas 
 
 Of the Spleen ^^ 
 
 CHAP. VIL ^^ 
 
 Of the Lii'er , 
 
 CHAP. VIII. "^^ 
 
 Of the Mufcles of the Anus, Penis, mdVefi- 
 ca Urinaria /- 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of the Method of extras ing the Spermatick 
 and Urinary Parts 5 _ 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Of the Preparation of the Kidneys, RenaU 
 glands, and Bladder 68 
 
 CHAR 
 
CONTENTS. ix 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 Of the Farts of Generation in Men yz 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Parts of Generation in Women j6 
 
 BOOK IT. 
 
 Of the Thorax or Chest. 
 
 CHAP. L 
 
 Of the common Integuments and Breajis 82 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of the Miifcles upon the Breajl 85 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 Of the Method of opening the 'Thorax 88 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 Of the Diaphragm 92 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 Of the Method of extraBing the Contents of 
 the Thorax 93 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 Of the Method of preparing theVifcera of the 
 Thorax 98 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 Of the Mufcks of the Larynx, Os Hyoides^ 
 a?td Tongue 10 1 
 
 BOOK III. 
 Of the Head. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Integuments of the Head 104 
 
 CHAP. 
 
X CONTENTS. 
 C H A P. II. 
 
 Of the Mufcles of the Face io6 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 Of the Mufcles of the Lower Jaw 1 08 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 Of the T)iffe5iion of the Skull 1 1 1 
 
 Of the common Method 112 
 
 Of the Varolian Method 115 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Adminijiration of the Membranes of 
 the Brain 118 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 Of the common Method of differing the Brain. 
 
 121 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Varolian and Sylvian Method of diffec^ 
 
 ting the Brain 127 
 
 Of the Sylvian Method 13 1 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the Method of difjeSiing the Eye 133- 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of the Method of diJjeSiing the Ear 142 
 
 BOOK IV. 
 
 Of the Extremities. 
 
 fhe IntroduBion 14S 
 
 CHAR 
 
CONTENTS. xl 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Method of raifing the Skin and Fat from 
 the Hand and Foot 152 
 
 CHAP, a 
 Of the Mufcles of the Scapida j^y 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 Of the Mufcles of the Humerus j6o 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 Of the Mufcles that move the Cubitus 1 67 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Mufcles 'which lie upon the Cubitus and 
 
 Radius lyi 
 
 CHAP. VL 
 
 Of the Mufcles of the Hand 183 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 €f the Mufcles that bend the Head 186 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 Of the Mufcles of the Neck» 190 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 of the Method of feparating the Skin and Fat 
 from the Foot 393 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 Of the Mufcles of the Thorax and Lpins 196 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 Of the Mufcles of the Thigh and Leg 200 
 
 CHAP, 
 
 y 
 
iii CONTENT* S. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Mufcles of the Tibia 213 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Of the Mufcles df the Foot 220 ; 
 
 BOOK V. 
 
 Of the Method of making a Skeleton» 
 
 The Preface 22^ 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Method of cleaning the Bones 228 
 
 Of the Separation and Divifion of the Bones 22 g 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 Of the Method of artictdating the Bones when 
 
 cleaned 248 
 
 Of articulating the Bones of the Upper and 
 
 lower 'Extremities 25 1^ 258 
 
 Of articulating the Coxendix 261 
 
 Of articulating the Vertebr<^ 263 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Ribs 264 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Head 267 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Lower faw 268 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 To make an Infant Skeleton 270 
 
 The Plates explained 273 
 
 INTRO- 
 
[ o 
 
 INTRODUCTION, 
 
 SECT. L 
 
 Of the SubjeSi of Anatomy. 
 
 N ATOMY feems now to 
 be the chief Province of thofe 
 who apply themfelves to the 
 p Study of Phyfick 5 for as they 
 in all their Operations, aim 
 only at the Support and Prefervatlon of the 
 Human Body, ib they unanimoufly make it 
 the proper Subjedl of Anatomy, becaufefrom 
 thence they endeavour to come at the Know- 
 ledge of the Situation, Connexion, Figure, 
 Magnitude, and Ufes of the feveral Parts, that 
 compofe the Human Syftem. It mull be al- 
 lowed, that the Difledion of Animals, if per- 
 B formed 
 
2 Introduction. 
 
 formed while alive *, is of great Service in 
 finding out the Ufes of their Parts, yet the like 
 Inferences cannot be dravv^n from thefe with 
 the true Objedis of Anatomy, becaufe the 
 DifTediion of Brutes is only accidental, and 
 therefore cannot be reckoned the true and 
 proper Subjed of Anatomy, except it be 
 taken in a general Signification, namely, as 
 far as Anatomy has a near Relation to Na- 
 tural Philofophy. But this laft being foreign 
 to my prefent Defign, I fhall therefore con- 
 fine myfelf to that, which properly belongs 
 to a Praditioner in Phyfick, and now attempt 
 to give a few Directions concerning the Choice 
 of thofe Human Bodies that are the mofl pro- 
 per Subjeds for Anatomy, if they can be 
 come at. 
 
 Human Bodies in general are either in a 
 good or bad State of Health. The former 
 are the moil proper for our Purpofe, while 
 we endeavour to find out the natural Confii- 
 tution of thofe Parts that compofe the Body, 
 and therefore ought to be fuch as have fufrer- 
 ed a violent Death, efpecially thofe who have 
 been hanged, or ftrangled -f. But if we want 
 
 * Of which Gale» differed ns lefs than fix hundred, 
 f It is for this Reafon that Rzo/an rejefted thofe who had 
 been drowned, though Ga/en made choice of them. 
 
 to 
 
Introduction* ^ 
 
 to find out the Nature and Caufes of DIftem- 
 pers, the latter are preferable, and it were 
 greatly to be wiihed, that we had more 
 frequent Opportunities than we acSlually have^ 
 of infpeding the Bodies of thofe who died of 
 any remarkable Diftemper, becaufe this would 
 be of particular Service and Advantage, both 
 to the Patient and Phyiician. 
 
 Belides thefe,^ feveral other Differences are 
 to be obferved. in Human Bodies, namely, 
 as to their Sex, Age, Quantity, and Qua- 
 lity. 
 
 As to the Sex, the Males and Females 
 muft be diffededj to come at the Knowledge 
 of the Differences of both Sexes, and the 
 Conftrudion of their Genital Parts. The 
 Diffedions of big-bellied Women, are alfo of 
 particular Ufes in the Pradice of Phyfick. 
 
 As to Age, thofe who die in their 
 Prime, or full Vigour, are the moil proper 
 Objeds of Anatomy, becaufe they are not fo 
 full of Juices as Children, nor are they fo 
 much emaciated, and deftitute of Blood as 
 old People are. However, it is abfolutely 
 neceifary to anatomize Children, in order to 
 find out the Differences between them, and 
 thofe of riper Years. Foetus's are like wife 
 B 2 proper 
 
4 Introduction. 
 
 proper Subjeds of the Knife, for feveral 
 Reafons. 
 
 In refped of Qu^antity, we ought to 
 pitch upon the largefl and talleft Bodies, 
 becaufe, according to the general Rule, the 
 Parts are in Proportion to the Body ; thefe 
 therefore in the lefTer Parts will be more 
 viiible. 
 
 As to Qu^ALiTY, a due Regard muft be 
 had betwixt fat and lean Bodies. For my 
 Part, I had rather chufe a lean than a fat 
 Body, if it be not quite emaciated and de- 
 prived of all its Juices -, for if the Body is 
 too fat, it will be a difficult Tafk to raife 
 the Mufcles, and prepare the Parts of Ge- 
 neration, as is plain to thofe who have been 
 at, or employed in the DifTedion of a Hu- 
 man Body, Therefore, to Ipeak in a few 
 Words, what I have faid before, concern- 
 ing the Subjed: of Anatomy, I look upon a 
 young, luily, found Body, not too lean nor 
 too fat, the moil proper Subject of Ana- 
 tomy. 
 
 SECT, 
 
Introduction. 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 Of the Anatomical Injiruments, 
 
 A V I N G made Choice of a good Bo- 
 dy, you are next to furnifh yourfelf 
 with fit Inftrumenta for performing your 
 Operations ; of which there are two Sorts ; 
 one for Ornament, another for Ufe : I fhall 
 pais by the former and treat of the latter, of 
 which there are twelve 3 viz, a Needle, Thread, 
 Dijjediing Knives, Small Hooks, 2. JVhet-Jione^ 
 Spunge, a Pair of Scijars, Probes, a Small 
 Tube, a Pair of Bellows, a Saw, and an Ele- 
 vator, 
 
 I, Before you enter on the DifTedion, you 
 are to ufe a Needle-, the mof} proper for 
 piercing the Skin is that edged like a Shoe- 
 maker's Awl. Some place the Needle-cafe 
 oppofite to that Part of the Skin where they 
 intend to ftick the Needle in, for prevent- 
 ing the Skin from giving way to the Needle, 
 and confequently farthering its Penetrations 
 through the Skin. 
 
 B 3 2. You 
 
6 Introduction/ 
 
 2. You muft next have Thread, which 
 mufi; be waxed for ftrengthening and fitting it 
 for Ligatures. Though the Manner of mak- 
 ing Ligatures is fufficiently known, yet thus 
 much may be added, that thofe VelTels and 
 Dudls, which are the proper Obje(5ls of Liga- 
 tures, being flippery on the Outfide, are con- 
 fequently apt to let the Ligature ilide off; 
 therefore to remedy this Liconvenience, you 
 are to draw your Needle and Thread through 
 the very Subftance pf thefe VeiTels or Duds, 
 and afterwards tie them by winding the Thread 
 round them. This is of great Ufe, and parti- 
 cularly to be obferved in tying up the Trunk 
 of the Cava coming out of the Liver. 
 
 3. Your T)tjje5ling Kjii-ves muft be made 
 of the beft Steel, and as fharp as Razors^ 
 Anatomifts have invented feveral Sorts j but 
 two are fufficient to anfwer all the Ends for 
 which they are intended 3 viz. that called by 
 Galen the Myrtle Knife from its refembiing 
 in Shape a Myrtle Leaf, and the other the 
 DiJeSling Knife. If the firfl he fmall and 
 taper, it comes under the Denomination of a 
 Small Sword: the latter, called by the Greeks 
 €'A'AO'!reg^ having its Point crooked like a Hawk's 
 Beak, is often termed the Crooked Knife. ^ For 
 
 ^ There are alfo two other Knives new ufed in DifTedling, 
 *viz. the Round edged Knife ^ and jhe Strait edged Knife. See 
 ^he platen 
 
 the 
 
F/vrt/tti^J'at/ r o' 
 
 3 
 
 Plate. I. 
 
 ff 
 
 7 
 
Introduction. ^ 
 
 the Operations of the Head, you muft have a 
 larger Knife about two Hands in Length, and 
 an Inch in Breadth, which is denominated 
 the Broad Razor. Some, to make the Knife 
 enter more fleady and firm, place the Mid- 
 dle Finger, guarded witli a femicircular iron 
 Plate, under it. Every Anatomiil may chufe 
 what Handles he thinks moft proper for his 
 Knives. 
 
 4. When you are to take hold of any Part, 
 it muft be done wi th fome S?nall Hooks ^ which 
 are of two Kinds, njiz. fuch as are double 
 pointed like common Forks, but thefe Points 
 muft be bent or crooked j or fuch as have 
 only one crooked Point. 
 
 5. You muft have a Whet-Jlone and Strap 
 for fetting and fliarpening your Knives. 
 
 6. You mufl have a Spunge for wiping off 
 the Excrements and drying up the Humidi- 
 ties or Blood that oufe from the dillecfting Parts. 
 
 7. You muft alfo be furniihed with folid 
 Probes like Bodkins, called by fome Spicilla 
 and Oricularia^ and, erroneoully by fome of 
 Gakris Interpreters Plates, for tracing the Paf- 
 fages and Extent of the VefTels j and as thefe 
 differ in Magnitude, fo you muft be provided 
 with fmooth Probes of different Sizes, having 
 at one Extremity a round Point or Bead of a 
 
 B 4 fmaiJ 
 
S Introduction. 
 
 fmall globular Figure. Thefe Probes are ei^ 
 ther made of Silver, Iron, Steel, Tin, or 
 Boxwood. 
 
 8. You mujfl: have a Pair of Sciffars for 
 cutting the Membranes ; and thofe made ufe 
 of in cutting the Coats of the Eye muft be 
 very fine, fmall and iharp pointed. 
 
 9. You muft have a ^ube for opening the 
 Dud:s, either by inflating or injedting them, in 
 order to find out the Extent and Opening of 
 the feveral PafTages. The Extremity to be 
 inferted ifito the Duds muil: be fmall and a 
 little bent, but the other may be fomewhat 
 larger. You ought likewife to have feveral 
 flreight Pipes, in order to put into the Ori- 
 fice of another, as Occafion requires, whofe 
 Length muft depend upon every ones Plea- 
 
 fure. 
 
 to. You muft have a Pair of Bellows for 
 inflating and extending feveral Parts belonging 
 to the Human Body, and fince every one 
 knows what belongs to a Bellows we need not 
 attempt their Defcription. 
 
 1 1 . You muft have fuch a Saw as is ufed 
 in Amputations for opening the Scull. This 
 Inftrument muft be made of the beft Steel, 
 and the lefier the better, providing it be ftrong 
 enough for the Operation. 
 
 IT. The 
 
Introduction:. 9 
 
 12. The lafl Inftrument is the Elevator 
 for railing up the upper Part of the Skull, 
 after fawed round. It is no Matter of what 
 Form or Shape it is, providing it be fo fitted 
 as to enter the Cleft of the Craniurn in order 
 to pull up the Skull, which, even after fawed 
 afunder, will adhere very clofe and firm to the 
 Dura Mater, 
 
 SECT. IIL 
 
 Some general Rules to he ohjerved 
 in DijjeBing. 
 
 I Would have none admitted to fee Dif- 
 fecflions but thofe who have made Phy= 
 fick or Surgery their Study : and even in 
 this I would not be fo ilrid: as Riolan^ 
 who excludes all young Students, and elpe- 
 cially Beginners, the Liberty of feeing or vi- 
 fiting DifiTedtions j becaufe, fays he, if they 
 jliould prove tedious and difficult, this 
 
 may 
 
lo Introduction. 
 
 may deter and oblige them to quit their 
 Studies. But this, in my Opinion, is trifling, 
 and demeaning the Charader of a Student 
 in Phyiick, who, by indefatigable Labours 
 and Induflry, ought to furmount all Diffi- 
 culties, in endeavouring to raife his Know- 
 ledge to the utmoft Pitch, and be ever 
 mindful of that Saying of the Oracle, ot^^iv 
 ^VBV TTOVS roTg ^vviroTg dilsffi oi u^uvuroi. T^he im- 
 mortal Gods have given nothijig to Man with" 
 out Labour. Therefore, I think, all Students 
 of Phyfick and Surgery, ought to be ad- 
 mitted, and others rejedied : the former muft 
 be prefent to be inilrudied in Anatomy and 
 the Art of Differing ; but the latter fhould 
 he excluded, left they fliould take the Li- 
 berty of finding fault with, and mifrepre- 
 fenting the Operations of Anatomifts. For 
 to perform every Operation in fuch a Man- 
 ner as to have the Approbation of all, 
 htqk T«v «Juv«Twv, is attempting an Mpojftbility. 
 The Proper Season for Anatomical 
 Preparations, is the Winter, becaufe Dead 
 Bodies keep longer in cold than in hot 
 Weather. But if^ fays Riolan^ you have an 
 Opportunity of dijjeciing a Female Subje5f tJi 
 Rummer, you muft not then refufe it, becaufe 
 
 this 
 
Introduction. ir 
 
 this does not fo often come under your Hands 
 as a Male. However^ to prevent its Jitdden 
 PutrefaBiofi and Corruption^ let it be laid^ 
 while dijjecilng^ upon Scordium or Periwinkle^ 
 midy when you have done, cover it over with 
 the fame Herbs ; likewi/e wafj the Internal 
 Parts with Salt Water ^ or Spirits, and after- 
 ward depofite the Body all Night in a Vaidt or 
 fo7ne I'ubterraneous Place. 
 
 The firfl: Operation to be taken in hand, 
 is To Clean the Body all over. Neatnefs muft 
 be minded as much as poffible, without 
 which the Difledion will be both tedious and 
 naufeous to the . Spedators. For, 
 
 Gratior ut pulchro eft veniens in corpore 
 virtus. 
 
 So Anatomy will always be more agree- 
 able, and attended with greater Succefs, 
 when managed by a clean neat Hand. 
 Riolan defires alfo that the Body be fhaved, 
 becaufe the Hairs are apt to blunt and fpoil 
 the Edges of the Knives. 
 
 Thefe Operations fliould be performed in 
 a Cold Place, therefore the Anatomift ought 
 to have a Fire-pan for warming his Hands 
 
 now 
 
12 Introduction, 
 
 now and then, but allow no Fire to be 
 made in the Room where the Body is, 
 becaiife a warm Hand will foon reduce 
 the rigid Members to their proper Tone. 
 
 You mufl have A Room well lighted for 
 your Operations, without which you can 
 never be able to fee all the minute Parts 
 of the Body, which are only defcernible by 
 a very quick Eye. Some chufe to diiTed: 
 in a dark Room, and prefer the Light of 
 a Candle to that of the Sun, but I am 
 rather for the Light of the Sun, and advife 
 that the Body intended for DifTecflion be laid 
 upon a Table, moving eafily round, that fo 
 you may more conveniently turn every Part 
 thereof to the Light, as Occafion fliall re- 
 quire. This moving Table is abfolutely ne- 
 ceilary in publick Diffedions, for every one 
 ftanding round to have a full View of what 
 Farts are propofed by the AnatomiJl:. Let 
 your Hand hang free while you are dilfed- 
 ing, by which you will be able with more 
 Dexterity and Conveniency to perform the 
 Operations, than when it is either leaning 
 upon the Body or Table, becaufe you may 
 more eafily dired your Hand at pleafure, and 
 better apply it to the Middling SeSiion. I 
 
 call 
 
INTRODUCTION. I3 
 
 call that a Middling SeElion^ when you go no 
 deeper with your Incifion than the Part to 
 be diffeded, or do not hurt the fubjacent 
 Parts. 
 
 Under the Denomination of Sedions, come 
 alfo that Separation performed /«t« Aaps-zv, 
 or by 'Excoriation^ which will be often men- 
 tioned hereafter. What this Separation is 
 will appear pretty plain from the following 
 Paffage of Galen^ The true Subjed: of Exco- 
 riation^ or Parts to be feparated, ;<«r« La^^h^ 
 are, when thefe Parts are compofed of a 
 Contexture of very fmall numerous Fila- 
 ments, like Cobwebs. Thefe thin Membranes 
 may be eafily feparated by the Fingers, yet 
 it is much more proper to feparate them 
 with the Knife, that you may fee what you 
 are about ; which cannot be done, if you 
 feparate them with the Fingers, becaufe the 
 Points will be fmeared and intercepted. 
 
 You are often to wipe off the liquid Sub- 
 ftance with a Spunge on account of its being 
 very troublefome, and if you'll credit Galen^ 
 nothing fo much difturbs the manual Operati- 
 ons in diffedtions as the Conflux of Blood and 
 other Humours. If you ihould by chance 
 happen to cut one of the great Veins which 
 
 will 
 
14 Introduction. 
 
 will be attended with a continual EfFufion of 
 Blood, you are to ftop it by a Ligature made 
 on the Vein above and below the Incifion. 
 If, in diired:ing a live Animal, you v/ound a 
 VelTel, Riolan and Galen advife you to cut 
 it afunder, becaufe, fay they, both Extremi- 
 ties will contrail themfelves backward v/ith^ 
 in the Subftance of the Flefh, and fo both 
 Orifices will be ftopt. But I very much doubt 
 the Truth of this Affertion, which will fcarce 
 fucceed^ efpecially in the larger Arteries, in 
 which the Blood, mixing with a greater Force^ 
 will make its Way wherever it finds the leafl 
 PalTage. 
 
 Having iiniilied your firft Days Work, you 
 are carefully to cover up the Body, it being 
 impoffible in one Day to diffect all the Parts ; 
 therefore, after leaving off, put all the Parts, 
 not yet feparated from the Body, in their 
 proper Places. Cover thofe VelTels laid bare 
 with a Piece of Fleili, or a wet Spunge, to 
 keep them from drying too much \ then lay 
 the Fat over it, and over that the Skin : but 
 the Infide of the Skin, as well as the Fat, 
 being flippery, they will give w^ay j to pre- 
 vent which, you may draw together and 
 fafccn the Extremities with a Needle and 
 
 Thread s 
 
Introduction. 15 
 
 Thread ; afterwards throw over it a Linnen 
 Cloth loofely to cover the whole Body, and 
 keep off the external Air. 
 
 When you enter again upon your DifTedli- 
 ons, cut off the Ligatures, and lay open the 
 Skin, Fat, and other Parts, till you have free 
 Accefs to that Place where you formerly left 
 oiF. 
 
 BOOK 
 
( 17) 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 Of the Abdomen, or Re. 
 GioN of the Belly» 
 
 CHAP, L 
 
 Of the Admtnljiration of the Cu^ 
 TicuLA, Cutis, Pinguedo^ 
 and the Membrana Carnosa, 
 
 I Would delire my Readers to follow the 
 Moderns in the Method I am to prefcribe^ 
 concerning Anatomical Operations, and 
 begin their Diire<5tions at the AbdomertzxA 
 its external Parts, 
 
i8 T& Me T HO D 
 
 I. The C u T I c u L A, 
 
 Or the Scarf-fkin, called by the Greeks 
 E-TFi^ipiiig ; which being difficult to be raifed 
 with the Knifcj therefore Anatomifls only 
 ihow a Part of it to the Spedlatops, be- 
 caufe it would anfwer no Intention to fe- 
 parate the whole. Riolan would have you 
 put your Hand under the Cutis, after fepa- 
 rated from the Flefh ; and then, by making 
 a gentle Incifion with the Knife, feparate a 
 fmall Part of the Ciiticiila, But the fame 
 Operation may be performed, while the Skin 
 is on the Body, though attended with Diffi- 
 culty, if not impradlicable. However, there 
 are other Methods by which the Ciiticiila may 
 be feparated and expofed to View. Riolan 
 would have you hold it to a Fire, or a Candle, 
 whofe Force will raife it into Blifters, which 
 is certainly an eafy Operation ; and for a 
 convincing Proof of this Experiment we often 
 fee large Portions of the Scarf-fkin raifed, 
 when burnt by Gun-powder. 
 
 Another way of raifing the Ciiticula, and 
 indeed the eafieft and beflj which is either 
 
 by 
 
of dij]eoiir;g BODIES. 19 
 by pouring on the Skin boiling hot Water, 
 till the Epider?nis rifes, then fcraping it off 
 with the Back of the Knife ; or by immerg- 
 ing the Skin in Water, till the Cuticle with 
 all its Elongations may be feparated, and in 
 that Cafe thefe Produdions carry along with 
 them the Hairs and Bulbs. 
 
 The Cuticle may be raifed from the Cutis 
 hy fharp and corroding Fluids, as in Ulcers 
 ariiing from acrid Humours, and other Tu- 
 mours. The fame may be alfo done by 
 tanning the Skin like Leather; for AUum 
 and Salt, the chief Ingredients made ufe of 
 in this Cafe, have a ftrong corroding Vir^ 
 tue, but this Method requires too much 
 Time; 
 
 IL The Cutis. 
 
 Having fhewn the feveral Methods of raif- 
 ing the Cuticle, we next come to the Admi- 
 niftration of the Cutis ^ or Skin, lying imme- 
 diately under it 3 but I muft firft fay fome- 
 thing concerning the Umbilicus^ becaufe ail 
 Anatomifts begin with it. 
 
 To raife the Umbilicus, deprefs the Skin 
 
 on each Side, then take hold of, and pull up 
 
 C 2 the 
 
10 The Method 
 
 the Navel between your two Fingers, or caufe 
 your Affiftant prefs both Ilia fo with his 
 Hands, that the middle Region of the Belly 
 may elevate itfelf. Sometimes it finks fo low, 
 that you are forced to draw it up with a 
 Hook. Having raifed the Umbilicus, run a 
 Needle with a Wax Thread through it, then 
 tie thereon a Surgeon's Knot, and cut it off at 
 fome Diftance from the Navel with a Pair of 
 Sciffars. This is of great Ufe in differing the 
 Cutis, making an Incifion in the Peritoncjeum, 
 and in demonftrating the Ligaments ariling 
 from the umbilical Vellels, as will appear 
 from what follows. 
 
 I now come to the Cutis, and defign 
 only to fhew its Diffedion in the lower Belly, 
 having already demonftrated its Separation -, 
 and if this is once well underftood, the fame 
 Operation may eafily be performed in any 
 other Part of the Body. 
 
 Begin at the Umbilicus ; take hold of it in 
 your left Hand by the Thread, and with a 
 fharp Knife make a circular or quadrangular 
 Sedlion round it, fo as the two oppofite An- 
 gles may point exad:ly to the Sides, and the o- 
 ther two to the Os Pubis and Cartilago Xiphoi- 
 des ', but take care not to make your Incifion 
 
 deeper 
 
of dijjetllng Bodies. 21 
 
 deeper than the Cutis ^ left you cut the fub- 
 jacent Parts. This being done, draw with the 
 Knife a ftreight Line from each Angle of 
 the Quadrangle upwards to the Middle of 
 the Sternumy downward to the tranfverfe Pro- 
 cefles of the Vertibrce on account of the ab- 
 dominal Mufcles ; but take care not to make 
 your Incilion fo deep in the Skin as to touch 
 the fubjacent Fat : However, the Knife may 
 be thruft in with fome Force, becaufe the 
 Skin being here fibrous and nervous, is not 
 eafily cut, but often flides from under the 
 Edge of the Knife ; therefore if the firft 
 Sedion do not reach the Fat, it muft be re- 
 peated. 
 
 Now for the Separation of the Cuth : To 
 perform this, delire your Ailiftant to hold the 
 umbilical Thread, and you, with the Nails of 
 your Left Hand, or rather with a Hook, 
 take hold of any Side of the Quadrangle ; 
 then keeping the Knife * very light in your 
 Right Hand, feparate the Skin from the Fat 5 
 but you muft dired: the Inftrument fo as 
 the Edge may incline a little toward the Fat, 
 
 * The Knife lit for this Purpofe muft be a little broad at 
 the Point, and not very fharp ; and if fuch a Knife is not 
 at hand, the Mjrtle Knife will ferve the Turn». 
 
 C 3 Of 
 
22 The Method 
 
 or keep a ftreight Courfe between it and the 
 Skin ; for a Gape in the Fat does not make 
 fuch an ugly Appearance, as a Hole in the 
 Skin will do -[-. 
 
 There is another Way of railing the Skin 
 from the Fat, but this only is to be performed 
 when the Skin and Fat have been both toge- 
 ther cut off from the Body j and are after- 
 ward to be feparated from each other ; for in 
 any other Preparation it is fcarce ufed, becaufe 
 the Fat would appear very much deformed ^ 
 on account of feveral Incifions made upon it. 
 The Method is this : Take hold of the Skin 
 with your Left Thumb and Middle Finger, 
 place your Fore-Finger under the Skin to be 
 
 ■j- Riolan, in his Anthropologla , fays it is lefs harm to cut 
 the Skin than the Fat, which he has taken from Galen, 
 whofe V/ords are to this Purpofe : Tou mujl divide the Mem- 
 brana Adipofa from the Skin, by gently turning the Knife to 
 the Skin ; for if you incline the Edge toivard the Membrana 
 Adipofa, you ivill certainly cut it ; but if you cut the Skin if^ 
 fsparating it from the Membrana Adipofa, no had Confequencs 
 n.villfollo-tv. Rjolan is here miftaken ; for in a later Edition 
 thefe Words are read in a quite different Senfe. Suppofing 
 what Galen had faid was true, it would anivver no Intention, 
 becaufe it only refers to the Difleftion of Brutes, in which 
 Galen was chiefly employed, and not to the Diffedtion of 
 Human Bodies, in whofe Writings we find few or no In- 
 ftances ; but this is certainly intended in this Place : For in 
 a Man the Membrana Carnofa is not next the Skin, but the 
 Fat is between thern, which is never wanting except in ema- 
 ciated People. As to the Anatomy of Srutes I am entirely 
 of Gate's Opinion, 
 
 divided. 
 
of differing Bodies. ^^ 
 
 divided, make an Incifion about three Inches 
 long, and hold the Knife, fo as to prefs upon 
 the Skin with its whole Breadth, and its Back 
 at a fmall Diftance from it j hence the Fat is 
 liable to be cut, and not the Skin *. Hav- 
 ing freed the Skin from the Fat, turn it back 
 upon the Sides *. 
 
 III. The PiNGUEDO, 
 
 Lying between the Cutis and Memhrana 
 Adipofa or Panniculus CarnofuSy cannot ealily 
 be feparated from each other without melting 
 the Fat, becaufe the membranous Fibres arq 
 fo interfperfed among the Fat, that they feem 
 to form one hetrogeneous Body. Therefore 
 this Membrane muft be feparated along with 
 the Fat from the fubjacent Mufeles •f'. 
 
 * Galen, before he attempted the Diffeftion of the Skin, 
 thought it too mean a Performance for him ; but having once 
 engaged himfelf in the Operation, found afterwards to his 
 Experience, that it required a very nice Hand. Hence, 
 fays he, ii is a Work that requires the utmofl Care, and is 
 only to he put into the Hand of one nvho is an Artiji, and dex-^ 
 trous in ujing the Knife. If the Operation is fo difficult in 
 Brutes, what muft it be in the Anatomy of a Human Body^ 
 on account of its very firm Coalition there. Yet I would not 
 from hence deter Beginners from attempting it, as Rialatt 
 has done, but advife to ufe their utmoll Care in any Part 
 of the Body, but here in particular. 
 
 •f- Riolan divides this Membrane into the Adipoji and Car^ 
 nofi; yet he fays they are infeparable, and make but one 
 Membrai;e. 
 
 C 4 IV. Mem^ 
 
C4 The Method 
 
 IV. Membrana ApiPosA, 
 
 You may feparate the Membrana Adipofa 
 or Carnofa, with the Fat from the fubjacent 
 Mufcles, if, after having made with the Knife 
 a Quadrangle round the Umbilicus j you make 
 a crofs Incifion, in form of an X, in the Cu^, 
 tis and Pinguedo, then along thefe Incifions 
 pull afide or raife the Fat with your Nails, 
 and by inferting the Myrtle Knife, which 
 muft not be very fharp, becaufe they cohere 
 only by thin Membranes, make a flight Inci- 
 iion by thrufting your Knife gently betweeci 
 the Membrana Communis Mufculorum, and th? 
 Panniadus Carnofus, Having cut thefe Fi- 
 bres you will fee very minute Veins paffing 
 along the Mufcles, elpecially the ReSti^ and 
 here and there entring the Fat and the Skirt 
 After you have taken a full View of their 
 Courfe and Diredlion, then cut them ofE 
 When the Fat is feparated, fold it back as 
 you did the Skin. 
 
 This is the general Method of feparating 
 or railing the common Integuments of the 
 Body, which is performed almofl: after the 
 fame Manner in every other Part thereof» 
 
of dtffeBmg Bodies. 25 
 
 but that this Operation may be compleat, I 
 will endeavour to explain the different Me- 
 thods thereof in the anatomy of each particu- 
 lar Part. 
 
 c H A p. li 
 
 v. 
 
 of the Method of Bijjetiing th 
 Abdominal Muscles. 
 
 ALEN had two different Methods of 
 raifing the Abdominal Mufcles ; one 
 by making an Incilion among the 
 Mufcles, after having opened the Thorax, and 
 taken a View of the Vifcera ; and the other, 
 by beginning his Incifion here, according 
 to the modern Method. But this having no 
 Relation to the Operation, I will therefore 
 pafs it, and only put you in Mind that there 
 are flill two Ways in beginning the Diffediion 
 of the Abdominal Muscles, 'uiz. either 
 at their Origines, or at the Commixtion of 
 their Tendons. You are further to obferve 
 concerning the tranfverfe and afcending Mufr 
 cleSj that if you intend to begin their Sepa.? 
 
 ration 
 
a6 The M E T H o i> 
 
 ration at their Origine, you are to turn tlie 
 Body on the Side oppofite to that you defign 
 to make your Operation, that fo you may 
 place yourfelf, when you are to begin the 
 Incifion at the Backfide, and reach the Loins 
 with the Knife. 
 
 I. MuscuLI Obliqui Defcendentes 
 
 Are thus to be raifed, by beginning at the 
 Ribs with the Point of the Knife, as Nature 
 herfelf will fhew. Separate the Tendinous 
 Digitations, or Indentations of the Obliquus 
 FiXtermis from thofe of the Seratus Major An- 
 ticus, till you fee the Ribs j and take care in 
 raifmg this Mufele, not to touch the Inter- 
 coilals, becaufe their Fibres clofefy cohere with 
 each other. This being done, take hold of 
 thefe Digitations in your Left Hand, and ufe 
 the Knife carefully, left you cut the Nerves 
 ariling from the Intercoftals with their Veins 
 and Arteries which clofely accompany this 
 Mufele as its Origine. 
 
 Turn the Body on the contrary Side, as 
 was before direded, raife that Part of the La- 
 iijpmus Dorji, which near the Vertebra, lies 
 SI little over this Mufele, that you may come 
 
 at 
 
of d'ljJeBing Bodies, 27 
 
 at its pofterior Part j then raife the Indentati- 
 ons of the S>eratiis^ and feparate this Mufcle, 
 from the fubjacent v.(iTa, Aapc/v, or with the 
 fubjacent Membrana, always differing towards 
 the fuperior and inferior Parts, fo by Degrees 
 you will come to the Loins, from which you 
 are to Separate this Mufcle. Afterwards fepa- 
 rate its Tendinous Connexion from the Os 
 Illium and Peritonceum, by putting the Knife 
 gently under, and carrying it along the Spine 
 towards the Os Pubis, and feparate the re- 
 maining Part yiurct ^upcriv. It is hard to diftin- 
 guifh the Tendon of this Mufcle from that of 
 the Obliqiius Afcendens^ on account of their 
 flrid; Union. 
 
 By beginning at the Infertion of this Muf- 
 cle, you are gently with a fharp Knife to fe- 
 parate its Tendon from the hinea Alba, Pe- 
 ritonmim, Ofilium, and the Loins ; then cut 
 off the remaining Part with the Skin. When 
 yora come to the Origine of this Mufcle, you 
 may take a full View of the Blood VefTels and 
 Nerves above mentioned. This Operation 
 piay be more eaiily performed, if you begin 
 your Incifion at the Spine of the Ofiliim, then 
 putting your Fingers underneath, the afcend- 
 ing and defgefiding Mufcles may there be fe- 
 
 parated. 
 
a8 TO^ M E T H O D 
 
 parated. mra. duptFiv and the Tendinous Begin- 
 ning cut off with the Knife. 
 
 II. MuscuLl Obliqui Afeendentes, 
 
 To raife the Mufcuhis Obliquus Afcendens, 
 begin at the Loins, where the nervous Origine 
 of the tranfverfe Mufcles will dired: you how 
 deep the Knife muft go, becaufe it will difco- 
 ver itfelf by its white Colour, and fhew you 
 that it is not now to be touched ; and thus 
 you are led to the Beginning of the DiiTedtion 
 of this Mufcle : Then proceed toward the Os 
 Pubis y and feparate it from the Margin of the 
 Ofihimj by putting your Finger under, and the 
 Knife very deep, after raifmg it from the 
 tranfverfalis nurx dupa-iVy and from the Carti- 
 lages of the Ribs. When you come to the 
 Linea Alba^ you muft flop, becaufe of the 
 Intermixture of the Tendons. 
 
 If you intend to begin your Incifion at the 
 Tendon, it muft be done in the Linea Alba -, 
 and fo you may proceed in your Operation, 
 as above diredled in the Adminiliration of the 
 above former Mufcle. 
 
 III. Mus= 
 
of diJeFihg Bodies. 19 
 
 III. MuscuLi Pyramidaks. 
 
 To come at the Pyramidal Mufcles, remove 
 the fat Membranes, and the Tendons of the 
 Mttfcidi ReBi j then make an Oblong Sedion 
 on either Side. As you proceed draw the 
 Mufcles with your Finger toward the oppofite 
 Side, and as far as you can feparate them from 
 the fubjacent Membranes s on the other Side 
 proceed in the fame Manner, till both are freed 
 from the fubjacent Parts ; then make a Lon- 
 gitudinal Inciiion in the Middle, where they 
 are conne(3:ed by Membranes. Laftly, fepa- 
 rate and cut off the Tendon creeping towards 
 the Umbilicus^ that you may turn the Muf- 
 cles down upon the Pudefida, 
 
 IV. MuscuLi Re5iL 
 
 The Mufculi Re5fi, have in the Middle fe- 
 veral nervous Innervations , whereby they 
 clofely adhere to the Tendons of the Mufculi 
 Obliqui Afcendentes j therefore thefe Tendons 
 muft be feparated by a careful Hand, or elie 
 thefe Interfedions will be fpoiled by too deep 
 Incifions. 
 
 Divide 
 
jo The Method 
 
 Divide the Tunicle or Involucrum of thefe 
 Mufcles, by making an oblong Incifion near 
 the Umbilicus^ and feparate it above ; which 
 Operation would be very eafy, were it not for 
 the tranverfe Enervations of the Mufcidi ReSti^ 
 which adhere fo very clofe to the Tendons 
 already mentioned ^ therefore you are to pro- 
 ceed with Care, in order to feparate theni 
 with a fharp Myrtle Knife. When this Tu- 
 nicle is taken off^ draw the Mufcle afide 
 with your Left Hand, and carefully feparate 
 it from the Cartilago Xiphoides^ for fear of 
 hurting the Mammary Veins in that Place. 
 Afterward take off, by degrees, the inferior 
 Part of this Coatj but take Care not to hurt 
 the Nerves and Veins coming from the Peri- 
 tojjceiim to thefe Mufcles. You will here meet 
 with one of the niceft Mailer-pieces of Nature 
 in the Diftribution of thefe Veflels -, for from 
 the inferior Part come the Hypogaflrick 
 Veins, which fend here and there leveral vi^ 
 fible Branches along this Mufcle. Thefe 
 Branches, as is commonly fuppofed, do not 
 unite with the Mammary Veffels by Ana- 
 fl:omofes, but terminate in feveral fmall Twigs 
 before they approach thefe Veins. When 
 thefe Mufcles are to be dilTedted^ firfl cut 
 
 away 
 
of deff'el^ing BODIES. 31 
 away the Veffels, then feparate the Mufcles 
 at their Orlgine from the anterior Part of the 
 Os Piibisy and turn them down upon the 
 Thighs. 
 
 V. MUSCULI Tranfverfaks. 
 
 To raife the Tranverfe Mufcles requires a 
 quick fight, fteady Hand, and a fharp Knife 
 well directed, on account of cutting the Pe- 
 ritoncsiim^ which is a very thin Membrane, 
 clofely adhering to this Mufcle ; wherefore 
 Labour, Time, and Patience are required; 
 for if you are too quick in the Operation, 
 this Membrane will immediately be perfo- 
 rated by the Point of the Knife only touch- 
 ing it. You will find it much more difficult 
 to begin and feparate this Mufcle from its In- 
 fertion, than from its Origine. According to 
 the latter, you are thus to proceed : J men- 
 tioned in differing the Oblique Defcending 
 Mufcle, that an Incifion muft be made to 
 reach the nervous Body, which is the Begin- 
 ning or Origine of the tranverfe Mufcle, 
 Thefe nervous Fibres lying diredly toward 
 the Umbilicus^ muft be crofi^ed by two fmall 
 Sedions ; hence the fubjacent Fat covered 
 
 with 
 
ji The Method 
 
 with a {lender Membrane^ will thruft itfelf 
 up, which is to be kept under -, fix a fmall 
 Hook in the Beginning of the Mufcle, and 
 raife it ; then with the Point of the Knife 
 feparate it from the Peritoneum ^ rather break- 
 ing than cutting the Fibres. When you have 
 got over the Corpus Ner'vofiim, put your Fin- 
 ger under the flefhy Origine of the Mufck, 
 near the Cartilages of the falfe Ribs j feparate 
 it frotn the Peritonceum, and above your Fin- 
 ger cut off the Mufcle > becaufe near the 
 Carttlago Enjiformis, they are narrow : Defire 
 one of the By-ftanders to put the Ribs as 
 much as poffibly he can upwards, that the 
 Operation may be more eafily performed. 
 Having thus freed it from the Cartilages, it 
 muft be in like Manner freed from the Spine 
 of the Ofilium^ and the remaining Part may 
 be fo feparated from the Peritonaum as its 
 nervous Beginning was j but this muft be 
 done with Care, for in that Place it fends off 
 a broad thin Tendon, or a fine nervous Sub- 
 fiance, and the Peritoneum fo clofely ad- 
 hering, that it can fcarce be feparated from 
 it. 
 
 If you proceed the contrary Method, you 
 muft begin with a gentle Sedllon near the- 
 
 Linen 
 
'of dtJfeEilng Bodies. 35 
 
 ijinea Alba, where the Tendon of this Muf- 
 cle takes it Origine ; which repeat till you fee 
 the Tendon gradually leave the Feritonmufi. 
 Make the Sedion Longitudinally along the 
 Abdo?72en, then fix a fmall Hook into thie 
 Tendon to elevate it, and feparate it from the 
 Peritonmim j but you are to turn the Edge of 
 your Knife towards the Mufcle to be diffeded, 
 and the Back towards the Perito?2ceu?n. 
 
 CHAR IIL 
 
 D//^^ Peritoneum andOwEi^^ 
 
 TUMi 
 
 
 I. The PeritOn^um^ 
 
 A I S E the Umbilicus by taking hold 
 of the Thread, perforate the Peri" 
 tonmim on each Side, then put a dif- 
 feeling Knife with the Point upward into the 
 Hole toward the Loins, and repeat the fame 
 Operation on the other Side, taking Gare not 
 to hurt the Inteftines, which^ if the Belly is 
 fwelled^ will burft out with a violent Force; 
 D Having 
 
34 The Method 
 
 Having folded thefe back in the fame Man- 
 ner, cut the upper Part of the Feritonceum 
 towards the Cartilago Xiphoides j and in the 
 Left Side, having thruft the Knife through 
 the fuperior and lateral Inciiion, feparate a 
 fourth Part thereof, and lay it back upon the 
 Breafl: : Afterward lift up with your Hand or 
 a Hook the other fuperior Part of the Perito- 
 nc^unij and with a Knife feparate that Part 
 of the umbilical Vein adhering to its Infide, 
 This done, cut the 'PeritoncEum near the JJm- 
 bilicuSj and turn it down upon the Breafl. 
 Having now removed one Half of the Ferito- 
 nceurriy the other half mull be divided into two 
 by an oblong Section, reaching the Os Pubis ^ 
 but while this Incifion is making, Care mufl 
 be taken not to hurt the Urachiis j therefore 
 put your Hand under the Peritonaeum^ iind 
 out its Situation, then you will difcover the 
 proper Place for making your Sedlion. Hav- 
 ing drav/n the Peritoneum a little back, fe- 
 parate from it the Urachus and Umbilical 
 Arteries, as you did the Umbilical Vein ; af- 
 terwards cut off the Peritoncsum at the Um- 
 bilicuSy and lay it back upon the Sides. * You 
 
 * Anatomlfts commonly cut through the Peritoneum with 
 a Pair of Scii'fars. While you are diiTefting the Membrane, 
 l would have you obferve its Duplicature, in which are chief- 
 
 mufl 
 
of dijjeciing Bodies. 35 
 
 Intifl not here negled: the Duplicature of the 
 Peritonceum^ which you may plainly obferve 
 in the Pelvis ^ wherein are contained the Blad- 
 der of Urine, the Kidneys, the two Lateral 
 ProcefTeSj the Spermatick VefTels, and Tefti- 
 cles in Men, and the round Ligaments of the 
 Womb in Women, &c. Before you proceed 
 farther, the Umbilicus^ which hinders the 
 Operation, mufl: be removed ; therefore cut 
 off the Urachus, with the Umbilical Arteries 
 near the Umbilicus^ and fold them back upon 
 the SideSj and place the Navel with the Um-^ 
 bilical Vein adhering to it upon the Liver^ 
 
 11. The Omentum* 
 
 The Epiploon^ or Caul, being a double 
 Membrane, appears next ; which if you have 
 a Mind to fee, cut off any of thofe Membranes 
 you pleafe, but efpecially where it adheres to 
 the Colon^ and put your Hand or a Hook in- 
 to the Incifion ; and there between its Du- 
 plicature, if you incline to feparate this Mem- 
 branCj begin at the right Side whereon the 
 
 \y placed the urinaty VeiTele ; likewife its feveral ProcefTes, 
 eipecially thofe which ferve to envelope the fpermatick Vef- 
 fels in Men, and the Reind Ligaments of the Womb m 
 Womea. 
 
 D 2 Extre^ 
 
'i6 The Method 
 
 Extremity may be come at, and proceed to 
 the left ; then cut off the Omentum from 
 the Co!o?2. When you are come to the 
 Stomach, you may cut it out if empty ; for 
 if full, it will fhew itfelf above the reft ; 
 then you may feparate the 0?nentum without 
 hurting the Coronary Veins of the Stomach 5 
 and when thus fieed, take it entirely out. 
 
 The Inteftines appear now naked with 
 the Stomach, whofe natural Situation you 
 may take a View of before you fet about 
 this Adminiftration. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
 Of the Stomach, Intestines^ 
 
 and Mesentery. 
 
 NATOMISTS commonly take out 
 the Stomachy Intejiines^ and Mejentery 
 at one Operation, which is thus per- 
 formed : Place yourfelf on the Right Side of 
 the Body, and turning the fmall Guts from 
 the left to the right^ free the Colon from 
 
 the 
 
of differing Bodies. 3 ^ 
 
 the Fent07iceiim with the fubjaccnt Membrane 
 to which it adheres ; then in hke Manner 
 feparate the Spleen from the Peritonmim^ tak- 
 ing Care not to lacerate its thin Coat Thus 
 you will come at the Stomach and its upper 
 Orifice, where it unites with the Oefopkagus : 
 But becaufe it lies very deep to the Vertebrce, 
 you muft lay under the Body near the Sto- 
 mach a Log of Wood, or a Brick, to elevate 
 the Region of the Stomach above the Breaft 
 and lower Parts ; then flide vour Left-hand 
 gently betwixt the Stomach and the left Hypo- 
 chondrhim^ and with your Finger feparate the 
 fmall Membranes lying between the Oefophagus 
 and the Pm^iJTZi^z////; afterward fold it round your 
 Middle and Ring-finger, and pull it fo far for- 
 ward as to be able to tye a firm double Liga- 
 ture ; then cut through the Oefophagus in the 
 Middle between the two Ligatures. This In- 
 cifion being made, raife up that Orifice of 
 the Stomach which is cut off, and below Se- 
 parate it from the Perito?imim. Turn next 
 to the left Side, and having thruft back the 
 Stomach and Inteftines in their Places, fepa- 
 rate in the right Side under the Liver the Colon 
 from the Feritonceum^ where it is join'd to the 
 Q41 Bladder, by wliich it is tinged with 
 D 3 a yeU 
 
5 8 The Method 
 
 a yellow Colour : It likev/ife joins the Kidney, 
 and is faflened to its Timica Adipoja by {lender 
 FibrilSj which are only carefully to be lopped 
 off, left you hurt the Capfidcz Atrahilarice, 
 You now come to the Duodenum^ wherein is 
 inferted the DuBus Choledochus^ on which 
 make a Ligature towards the Liver, and cut 
 it off towards the Liteftines. Search for the 
 Vena Fort a in the Concavity of the Liver, and 
 when feparated of its Fat, cut it off. 
 
 Do the fame to the Mefenteric Arteries, and 
 thus the Mefentery, v/ith the Inteftines, will 
 be almoff feparated, and may be taken out 
 with the Stomach and Spleen. What remains 
 nov/ to be extracted is only the Intejiinum Re- 
 Bum, lying in the Pelvis ; therefore put your 
 Hand into the Pelvis^ take hold of the Gut with 
 your Fingers, and pufh the Fences upward till 
 you have Room to make a Ligature thereon^ 
 which muft be done in two Places ; then cut 
 the Inteftine through between the Ligatures. 
 It would be more proper to pull out the whole 
 Inteftine, and not a Part j but it has fuch a 
 clofs Connexion with the circumjacent Parts, 
 that it is almoft impoffible to feparate it with- 
 out bringing them along with it ; befides, the 
 frnall Aperture betwixt the Legs, v^'here the 
 
 AnaU)= 
 
of dtfJcEllng Bodies. 39 
 
 Anatomift ftands, and the large Qiiantlty 
 of Fat, are a great Hindrance to this Ope- 
 ration. 
 
 The Intejiines, Spleen^ Pancreas, Stomachy 
 and Mefentery, being altogether extracted from 
 the Body, you are next to feparate them from 
 one another ; therefore take off firft the 
 Spleen, with its fJDlenic Branches, and place 
 them fo on a Table, that Part of the Pancre- 
 as, to which the fplenic Vein and Artery ad- 
 here, may ly uppermoft ^ then feparate thefe 
 with the Knife, by making Inciiions longi- 
 tudinal in the Pancreas, make a Ligature in 
 each of the feparated Branches, and cut them 
 off. Find out the Infertion of the Vas Breve 
 into the Sto?nach ; and after making a Liga- 
 ture thereon, cut it, and feparate the Spleen 
 for a further Preparation. The Pancreas 
 iliould next be removed ; but becaufe we 
 cannot fee the Entrance of its Dud; with- 
 out opening the T)iiodemim, therefore it mufl 
 be fo feparated from its Membranes, as to 
 cohere with this Litefline. 
 
 The Inteftines in all Demonftrations beins 
 
 laid on a Table, and expofed to View, fliould 
 
 be cleaned, and afterwards inflated. The 
 
 firlt Operation is performed by adapting a 
 
 D 4_ Funnel 
 
40 The M E T H o B 
 
 Funnel to the Orifice of the Stomach, through 
 which pour a certain Quantity of Water^ 
 till it finds its Exit at the Colon. You can- 
 not pour the Water in at the Intejiinum Rec- 
 tum, becaufe Wind that Way cannot get 
 beyond the Colon^ much lefs Water. 
 
 The fecond Operation is performed, firfl:, 
 by making a Ligature upon the lower Ex- 
 tremity of the Guts, then fixing the Mouth 
 of a Pair of Bellows into the Orifice of the 
 Stomach, by firmly tying a Thread round it, 
 and inflating the whole Inteftines. 
 
 In pulling out the Inteftines, you may ob- 
 ferve their Membranes or Coats, whereof Ga- 
 Im mentions only two, not taking Notice of 
 the iirft, njiz. That arifing from the Perito^, 
 nceiim^ which our modern Anatomifis do, but 
 with this Difference, call it the common, 
 and the other two the proper Coats. You 
 may after the following Manner find out their 
 three Coats. The fiiiali Membranes you be- 
 fore obierved to (brink in, feparating the 
 Mcfentery, take up with your Nails, and 
 you v/iil feparate the firfl Coat,, that takes its 
 Origine from the Peritonaeum. This Coat 
 being removed, make here an angular Inci- 
 fion 5 then raife that diiTeded Coat, and 
 
 fcrape 
 
of dtjjecimg BODIES. 41 
 f:rape it off from the fubjacent, viz. The 
 third Coat, covered on the Infide with a mu- 
 cous Crufl, to fee which make a longitudi- 
 nal Sedion in the Inteftine. 
 
 Before you enter upon the Stomach, you 
 may obferve the Ccecum with the Valve 
 which divides the great Guts from the fmall j 
 but you will have a better View of thefe, if 
 you cut off about four Inches of the Intefti- 
 num. Colon and Ilion ; for tlie Colo?i adheres 
 externally, but the Valve lies within. To 
 have a clear Idea of the Strength of this 
 Valve and Situation, pour Water into the 
 Colon, which will not run out at the oppo- 
 iite Part, except the Valve be very flacid 5 
 b|ut if poured into the Ilio?t, it immediately 
 runs through. Having poured out the Wa- 
 ter, divide the Inteftine longitudinally, and 
 you will more plainly obferve the Valve. 
 Having taken a View of this Valve, pafs 
 next to the Ccecum, which adheres to the Co- 
 lon near the fame Place, and is very fmall 
 in refpecl of the other Inteftines *. Find out 
 its Entrance with a Probe, and fee whether 
 
 * Our Autkor fays, in Lib. III. Qbj. 21. Thathecnce 
 found in an Infant the Caawi three Times larger than the 
 Colon. If ever he did find it of this Matrnitude, he ii the 
 only one that can boaft ^ fuch an Obfer\'ation. 
 
 it 
 
42, The Method 
 
 it is a double PalTage, as fome Anatomifts af- 
 firm ', * or a fingle one, as I have always ob- 
 ferved. You will find it larger in Infants in 
 Proportion to the Magnitude of their Bellies, 
 than in Adults, and full of Excrements, -f- 
 
 Having done with the Guts, we now come 
 to the Stomach, whofe Coats you are to fe- 
 parate as you did thofe of the Inteftines 3 af- 
 terwards take Notice of the Gailric Veins 
 creeping along its Bottom, then with a Knife 
 open its Orifices, to obferve fome flefhy Fibres 
 in the fuperior, or left Orifice, and a thick 
 fiefhy carnous Circle like a Sphinfter, fur- 
 rounding the Infide of the inferior, or right 
 Orifice, termed the Pylorus. 
 
 But in the Method of differing the Sto- 
 niach, many Parts are cut off, which would 
 be of Service if kept on -, it would therefore 
 be much better to begin from the yejiinumy 
 and firfl cut off the Inteftines only, as Ria- 
 Ian obferves. But in this Adminiftration the 
 following Order mull be obferved. Having 
 
 * I imagine that thefe Gentlemen were much more em- 
 ployed in the Diffeftion of Brutes than of Human Bodies, 
 and as they found it fo in the former, they therefore took it 
 upon Credit that it mufi be fo in the latter. 
 
 f Alhertus and Bartholin found this InteHine miffing in 
 
 fepa- 
 
of d't[feBi?]g Bodies. 43 
 
 ^parated the Colon on the right Side, thruft 
 it toward the left, that you may come at the 
 Duodejium ; there find out the biliary Dud:, 
 and tying the Gut above and below the Dud:, 
 cut it afunder between the Ligatures j after- 
 ward take hold of the Inteftine, and gently 
 touching the Mefentery, feparate its upper 
 Membrane, which leaving the Inteftine clear, 
 will point out the Place where the other 
 Membrane is to be perforated, viz. Next to 
 the Intefline. In this Operation, you are to 
 continue both in the upper and lower Mem- 
 brane, till you come to the Intejtinum Rec~ 
 tum^ which take out, as above direded. 
 
 Fernelli obferves the fame Method in tak-^ 
 ing out the Intefl:ines,but with this Difference, 
 that he begins from the 'Re^ium-^ but he makes 
 two Ligatures on the yejunum, and cuts it 
 afunder between the Ligatures, before it 
 runs under the Vena Porta, that he may re- 
 move at Pleafure from Place to Place the In^ 
 teftines. 
 
 Some injed Water into the Stomach by 
 the Mouth, before taken out, to make it 
 fhew its natural Situation the better j but 
 this may be left to every one's Fancy. The 
 Jnteftines being extradedj there remains now 
 
 m 
 
44 The M E r u o jy 
 
 in the Body the Ventricle , Spleen^ Pancreas, 
 and the Mefentery, which may be all at once 
 taken out in the fame Manner as above di- 
 reded. But if you follow this Method ^ I 
 would advife you to pull out the Oefophagus 
 and Stomach, together with the Liver, Spleen, 
 'Pancreas, and Mefentery ; however, Anato- 
 mifis feldom ufe this laft Method. I have 
 like wife added the following Obfervations, 
 ii you have a Mind to trace the Nerves that 
 come from the Stomach. The common 
 Method is as follows. The Thorax mud 
 be firft opened, and its Vifcera taken out s 
 but take Care not to eradicate the Nerves 
 of the iixth Conjugation, then the Dia- 
 phragm to the PalTage of the Oefophagus ,h\i\.6iO 
 not touch the abovementioned Nerves ; paffing 
 the fame Way afterward, cut with the Myrtle 
 knife thefe Membranes which conned: the Oe~ 
 fophagiis to the A/per a Arteria, to free it from 
 thofe Parts in the Thorax whereto it is joined. 
 Next, Cut off the Nerve defcending with the 
 Stomach, at its Origine, and thruft the Oejb- 
 phagiis downward, by an Incifion made ia 
 the Septum Tranfuerfum to the Abdotnen. 
 The Livei muft now be feparated from the 
 Diaphragm, as fhall be (hewn hereafter, and 
 
 lemoved 
 
of difJeElmg BODIES. 45 
 removed to the left Side of the Abdomen, 
 after having made a Ligature upon the Trunk 
 of the defcending Ca'va^ then feparate the 
 Mefenteric Arteries, and having made Liga- 
 tures thereon, cut them off. The other 
 Parts are feparated in like Manner as the 
 Stomach, Spleen, and Pancreas. 
 
 The Parts thus extracted being laid on a 
 Table, firft feparate the Mefentery Velfels 
 from the Fat, till you come to the Origine 
 of the Splenic VefTels ; having made a Liga- 
 ture thereon, cut off the remaining Part of 
 the Mefentery, and lay it in one Side ; the 
 other Parts you may thus place on the Ta- 
 ble ^ the Liver lay on its convex Part to the 
 right, the Spleen to the left, and the Sto- 
 mach in the Middle, with the Pancreas a- 
 bove it. Having thus placed them, clear the 
 biliary Dud from the Fat, that you may 
 fee its Progrefs and Entrance into the Dtiode- 
 num^ in like Manner the Splenic Branches, 
 both Vein and Artery of their Fat and Mem- 
 branes, then the Vas Breve, which joins the 
 Stomach with the Spleen j next to this, take 
 the Stomach in your Hand, and beginning 
 at the Top, feparate the Nerve of the fixth 
 Pair, proceeding to the Stomach, and taking 
 
 off 
 
46 The Method 
 
 off the Membranes, unfold the Plexus Ner^ 
 "Vortim, where you may obferve a fine and 
 beautiful Contrivance of Nature in the Di= 
 f}ribution of thefe VelTels ; afterwards fepa^ 
 rat© the Mufcles of the Oefophagus. The U"- 
 ijida is joined to the Oefophagus by its Mufcles, 
 which cut off. You need not fear hurtins: the 
 Mufcles, that cannot be, becaufe they run 
 below, along the Sides of the Oefophagus. 
 
 The Oefophagus has a great many MuA 
 cles, but the largefl is the Sphinder, which 
 fhutting its Orifice, and furrounding it, is 
 eafily diffinguifhed from the reft by the 
 Diredlion of its Fibres ^ the other Mufcles 
 lying very clofe together, and differing 
 very little from the dire6l Situation of their 
 Fibres, are difficult to be diftinguifhed. 
 The fmalleft Mufcle called Stylopharyngceus^ 
 is on both Sides fituate next to the Sphindier ; 
 the fecond, being broader, and denominated 
 Sphcenopharyngc^us, is joined to the Infertion 
 of the former Mufcle, but is fomev/hat di- 
 flant from it at its Origine ; the third term- 
 ed Cephalopharyngaus, is the broadeft Mufcle, 
 and is fituated in the pofterior Part. Each 
 of thefe three Mufcles are placed on both 
 Sides of the Oefophagus^ and therefore make 
 
 three 
 
of dtjJeEllng Bodies. 47 
 
 three Pair. How far they are to be feparat^ 
 ed, will eafily appear from what has been 
 faid. 
 
 We muft, in this Sc<5tion, treat of the 
 Mefentery, becaufe it is joined with the In- 
 teflines, and keep them in their regular Order 5 
 in it you are to obferve VeiTels, Membranes, 
 Glands, and Fat ; the Fat is fometimes in fo 
 large a Quantity, that you can fcarce dlfco- 
 ver its Veflels, but more particularly the Lac- 
 teals. Some fmall Glands are alfo interiper- 
 fed upon the Mefentery 3 the largeft of which 
 is fituate near the greatefl: of the Vena Porta, 
 affording the Ladleals a fafe PalTage, and is 
 by Afiliiu called the Pancreas, which has oc- 
 cafioned a Miflake to many. Thefe Glands 
 are never, or very rare dilfeded, but only 
 the greater are opened to fee their containing 
 Fluids. The Mefentery has a double Mem- 
 brane from the Feritonceum ; to find out this 
 Duplicature, make an Incifion into either 
 Membrane, and pull it off with your Fin- 
 gers towards the Inteftines, which will eafily 
 follow, and give a full View of the fubja- 
 cent Glands and Fat ; on the oppoiite Side, 
 you will find the other Membrane intire. 
 
 The 
 
4B The Method 
 
 The Mefentery is furnifhed with VelTels 
 of eveiy Kind, bat the Veins and Arteries 
 are not confpicuous -, and in living Crea- 
 tures, or thofe imnnediately choaked after 
 feeding the Lacteals, thefe Veflels are di- 
 ftinguiihed from each other by their Colour. 
 The Veins feem livid, on account of the 
 Transparency of the Blood ; the Arteries be- 
 ing now empty, appear wh'itifh or yellow- 
 lih J but the Lafteals, if full, are perfedlly 
 white, if empty, invifible ; however^ more 
 of this in the next Chapter. 
 
 The m.ore curious fometimes feparate the 
 Mefenteric VelTels from the Membranes, 
 Fat, and Glands, in order to fhev/ the Di- 
 ilribution of thefe Veflels j In profecuting this 
 Method, they begiii at the Vena Porta, 
 and take off all the Membranes of either 
 Side, which may be done with the Nails, 
 then in like Manner the Membrane of the 
 other Side. 
 
 The Membranes being now renioved, you 
 are with a Knife to feparate the large VelTels 
 from the Fat, till you come to the fmall 
 ones, where the Operation is both tedious 
 and troublefome, on account of the vaft 
 [uantity of capillary VelTels. To prevent 
 
 this 
 
of dijje5iing Bodies. 49 
 
 this Difficulty, expand the Mefentery on a 
 Table, and fqueeze the Fat with the Back 
 of your Knife toward the Extremities, and 
 thus you will eafily clear your Mefentery of 
 all its pinguous SubftancCj then work ' the 
 Veins witli warm Water. 
 
 CHAP. y. 
 
 of the L A C T E A L s. 
 
 S to the Ladteals, we mufl obferve in 
 particular, that the Difcovery of 
 thefe Veffels is fcarce ever to be made 
 in one and the fame Body, where you in» 
 tend a perfecft DifTedion of the other Parts, 
 becaufe many Reafons may be given why 
 thefe Veffels cannot remain vifible for any 
 conliderable Time after Death 5 therefore 
 foon difappear, and efpecially the Mefenteric 
 Ladleals, when expofed to the Air. 
 
 Hence there muft be two Operations of 
 
 thofe VefTels, one which treats of feparatin^ 
 
 only the Ladteals^ without minding the o-^ 
 
 B thsi* 
 
50 The Method 
 
 ther Parts, another which manages them 
 with the other Parts. 
 
 Thfe iiril of thefe is accurately handled by 
 I'h. Bar tho line in his Anatomical Hiftory of 
 the Thoraic Lacfleals, to which I refer you y 
 the latter I fliall here briefly explain. 
 
 Having carefully opened the exterior Parts 
 of the Abdomen^ turn to the Omentum ly- 
 ■ing upon the In trails upward ; then, pufh- 
 ing the fmall Guts out of their Places, ob- 
 ferve whether you can fee fmall white Ca- 
 nals on the Surface of the Mefentery, which 
 are AJjellim\ Ladieals ; if they do not appear 
 after a veiy ilrift Search, it mult be either 
 imputed to long fafting before Death, or 
 your Delay in not immediately feparating the 
 external Parts after Death. If thofe Veflfels 
 appear, throwing afide the Inteftines, feek 
 for the 'Mefenteric Gland, where the Vena 
 Porta divides itfelf into a great many Rami- 
 jRcations -, you will meet with a Confluence 
 of La(5leals, which go to the Lumbar 
 Glands. 
 
 It is enough to take a tranflent View of 
 them here. You then proceed to the Ad- 
 minifliration of the Inteftines, Stomach, and 
 Liver, and the remaining Vifcera in the low- 
 er 
 
of di[Je5iing BoDIESo 51 
 
 er Belly, as fhall be fhewn in its proper 
 Place. 
 
 After this, you enter upon the Anatomy 
 of the "Thof-ax in the ufual Way, as fhewn 
 in Book 11. and lay bare the Spine of the 
 ...Back : But, in opening the vital Organs, two 
 Things mufl be confidered. i. To make a 
 Ligature on the left Subclavian Vein, im- 
 mediately after its Origine out of the Trunk. 
 2i In feparating the yf(?r/^, the Fat lying un- 
 der, and ferving as a Pillow or Cufhion for 
 this VefTel to reft upon, muft be left un- 
 touched all along the Spine^ becaufe the tho- 
 rax is inveloped in it* 
 
 If the Spine be laid bare^ you mufl makd 
 an Incilion into the Diaphragm, and care- 
 fully divide its ProcelTes, efpecially the right 
 one, from the Lumbar Vertebrce^ becaufe un- 
 der it lies the Ladteal Branch, which afcends 
 to the T^horax j then find out the Ladieal 
 Vein after the following Manner* If there 
 are ftill fmall Glandsj pull them gently, and 
 you will eafily find the PalTage of the Vef- 
 fels J but if quite obliterated, you need not 
 defpair, but only clear the Spinal Vertebrd 
 of their Fat vviththe Point of the Knife, and 
 then you will infallibly find the Veflel, which 
 E % VelTd 
 
52 The Method 
 
 VefTel raife with your Hand, or a Hook, 
 and proceeding upward, feparate it above 
 from the Fat, and below from the Spine -, 
 but you muft be very careful near the Cla^ 
 'vicula, becaufe there it divides itfelf into 
 feveral Branches. 
 
 Therefore, to difcern thefe minute Rami- 
 fications nicely, make a longitudinal Inci- 
 fion into the inferior Parts of the Veflel, in 
 which put a flender Tube, then preffing the 
 VefTel tight with your Fingers round the 
 Tube, defire a By-ftander to blow in, and 
 you will eafily fee in what Place the Inci- 
 lion is to be made, likewife plainly perceive 
 whether it enters the Subclavian by one, 
 two, or three Branches, afterward cut off 
 the Fat, where you obferve the greatefl 
 Commotion. 
 
 If the Infertion of this Canal be only 
 fingle, you may eafily obferve the Situation 
 of its Valve 5 thus make a Ligature on the 
 Extremities of the Jugilar and Axilary Veins, 
 to prevent the Inconvenience of the iffuing 
 from thence ; then make a longitudinal In- 
 cifion in the Axilary Vein, and injed: it with 
 Air or Water through a Tube, where you 
 obferve a Motion to be flrongefu, there the 
 
 Infertion 
 
of dij[e[^ing BODIES. 55 
 Infertion is, and a very thin Membrane which 
 fupplies the Place of the Valve, to flop the 
 returning Fluids, which you will eafily per- 
 ceive, if you narrowly infpedl the Subcla- 
 vian Vein. 
 
 C H A P. VI. 
 
 Of the Pancreas and Spleen. 
 L The Pancreas. 
 
 1 
 
 ■^HE Verfunglan Du5i^ on whofe Ac- 
 count the Adminiftration of the 
 Pancreas is undertaken, terminates 
 in the Intejlinum Duodenum ; wherefore, if 
 you have a Mind to fee the Infertion of this 
 Canal, a Part of the Duodenum mufl be cut 
 off from the reft of the Inteftines, otherwife 
 you cannot trace the Infertion of this Dud:, ' 
 which joining with the Dudius Cholidochus, 
 enters this Inteftine about two Inches below 
 the Pylorus. 
 
 The Pancreas being laid on a Table, make 
 
 a longitudinal Incifion through the Middle of 
 
 E 3 its 
 
54 57>^^ Method 
 
 its Coat, afterward by going gradually deep- 
 er, fcrape off the Pancreatick Subflance 
 with the Point of the Knife, but take Care 
 not to go too deep lefr: you hurt the Canal^ 
 if you oblerve a fmall white Membrane in 
 the Subftance of the Pancreas^ you may fup- 
 pofe it to be the external Coat of that Canal 
 Dud, therefore follow it y both toward the 
 Inteftines it is broader, and toward the Spleen 
 it grows narrower ; but it fends off fmall 
 Branches on both Sides like a Feather, which, 
 if you would obferve, you muff fcrape the 
 glandulous Subftance quite away till you 
 come at them. You may find the Entrance 
 of this Duct into the Inteftines, either by 
 injecting it with Air or Water ^ to do this, 
 make a longitudinal Incifion, fix a fmall 
 Tube in it, then injedl either Air. or Water 
 t»y this Tube through the Canal, and where 
 the Air or Water come into the Duodenum, 
 that is the Place of this Canal's Infertion into 
 that Gut. 
 
 You can fcarce enter it by a Probe or 
 Tube in the Infide of the Duodenum^ becaufe 
 it is there furnifhed with a thick membra- 
 iious Circle, to prevent the Chyle and Ex- 
 crementS;, while ^{Ung dloiig the Duodenum,^ 
 
 from 
 
of dt[fe[ltng Bodies. ^s 
 
 from entrlng here. If you blow in at the 
 other Extremity, you will be fenfible of 
 thefe Valves which oppofe the Air's Ingrefs 
 into the Capillary Veflels. 
 
 The Splenick VeiTels adhere to the lower 
 Side of the Pancreas^ which fliould be fepa- 
 rated at the fame Time with the Inteftines, 
 as above directed ; but if they flill adhere, 
 you muft feparate them, to examine further 
 into the Spleen. 
 
 II. The Spleen. 
 
 The Method of taking the Spleen out of 
 the Body has been already exhibited, there- 
 fore a Repetition would be to no Purpofe, 
 In taking out the Spleen, we are to look into 
 its VefTels, Membranes, and the Farenchy- 
 ma. The greateft Difficulty in this Opera- 
 tion, confifts in removing the Fat plentiful- 
 ly furrounding the VeiTels ; therefore you 
 muft take Care in feparating it. To do 
 this, a Probe or Stick muft be gently intro- 
 duced into thefe Veffels -, therefore you muft 
 take Care, in feparating it, not to hurt the 
 VefTels, that fo being rendred bigger and 
 larger, they will be vifible. You muft ob- 
 E 4 ' ferve^ 
 
^6 The Method 
 
 ferve, that thofe VeiTels do not always enter 
 the Spleen by one Branch, but fometimes 
 by two, and fometimes by three. You are 
 not here to pafs by the Vas Breve^ which 
 generally approaches the Stomach by one 
 Branch ; yet Nature feems fometimes luxu- 
 riant here as in other Places, For I have 
 obferved, in the differing of the Spleen of a 
 iplenetick Perfon, three large vilible Branch- 
 es. If you have a mind to fliew its Mem- 
 brane, make a very light angular Incifion, then 
 lift up the Membrane with a Hook, or you 
 may take it off with the Point of a Knife 
 as you think convenient. Sometimes it comes 
 off as foon as touched, as it did in the 
 Spleen, whofe Coat was fo very thick, that it 
 could be fo feparated with the Back of the 
 Knife. The Membrane being taken off, what 
 remains is the Parenchyma, joined with the 
 Veffeis J but the Method of feparating them, 
 we fhall (how in the End of the next Chap- 
 ter. 
 
 C H A P 
 
 |»^y><vfe! 
 
of dijjefiing BODIES. ^f 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Liver. 
 
 THE Separation of the Liver is the moft 
 difficult Operation of any, by reafon 
 • of its near and clofe Connecftion with 
 
 the Septum Tranfverfiim by the Cava, which 
 will fcarce admit of a Ligature, therefore the 
 Operation fhould only be undertaken by an 
 able Hand. Fernelius, on account of its U- 
 nion with the fuperior Parts, thinks it can 
 neither be feparated, nor taken out of the 
 Body ; but that this Difficulty may, in fome 
 Meafure, be removed, put fomething under 
 the Back, near the Region of the Liver, as 
 has been already dired:ed concerning the Sto- 
 mach, in order to raife it, and make it hang 
 Hoping toward the Os Pubis, but let the 
 Vifcera of the middle Cavity incline toward 
 the Neck ; then have a lighted Wax-candle, 
 tQ fee what you are doing; becaufe your 
 Hand being in the Light, will ohftruft your 
 Operation Having now prepared every 
 
 Thing, 
 
 £ 
 
58 Tke Method 
 
 Thing, next enter upon your DiiTedlon. 
 Firji, with the Palm of your Hand, deprefs 
 the Liver, and cut off with a Knife the 
 Ligamentum Sufpenforiu?n Hepatis^ afterward 
 take hold of the Knife by the Extremity of 
 its Handle, that it may enter deeper, becaufe 
 it muft penetrate the Cava, which is fituate 
 very low, and the fmall Membranes, v/ith 
 the Fibres, muft be removed, till the livid 
 Colour of the Blood appears through the 
 ■Cava, which, when perceived, you muft 
 flop here j beginning on the right Side, prefs 
 the Liver as much as pofTjble to the left, or 
 you may turn the Body to the left Side, and, 
 in like Manner before direcfled, cut off the 
 conned:ing Fibres, or feparate, by the Way 
 of E?:ecration, till you fee the Cava, Like- 
 wife, thrufl your Finger under the Cava, , 
 but without hurting its Trunk, till you find 
 a PalTage to the other Side, on which make a 
 tight Ligature. After having carefully ftript 
 the defcending Trunk of its Membranes, 
 and made a Ligature above the Emulgents, 
 cut off, on both Sides, the Cava near the 
 Liver, and then you may take it out, being 
 liow quite free, without Difficulty. 
 
 After 
 
of dt[feSih/g Bodies. 59 
 
 After cxtrading the Liver, the Membrane 
 muft be demonftrated. Make a very gentle 
 angular Incifion in this Membrane, afterward 
 fcparate it with the Handle of your KnifCj 
 as you did the Splenic Membrane. 
 
 We are next to obferve the Liver, the 
 Gall, Bladder, and Biliary Dud ^ but as I 
 mentioned in the laft Sedion, a Part of the 
 Duodenum muft be left in the Body to tracs 
 their Infertion j therefore having cleared the 
 DuSlus Cholidochus of its Fat, feparatc the 
 Vejcicida Fellis a little, that you may obferve 
 the PafTages which go thither from the Liver. 
 Then lay the Liver on a Table, with its con- 
 cave Part uppermoft, and defire a By-ftand- 
 er to keep it immoveable with both his 
 Hands ; afterward thruft your fore and mid- 
 dle Fingers, being a little feparated, into its 
 Bottom, pull off the Membrane from the 
 Liver, and with the Point of a Knife fepa- 
 rate the interveening Fibres that tend this 
 Way, till you fee the minute Veffels here 
 and there entring the Subftance of the Li- 
 ver, which muft be carefully preferved. Near 
 the Bottom, you commonly meet with a 
 large Veftel ; if you defire to fee the Place of 
 Infertion^ having opened and cleaned the Du- 
 
 odmwn 
 
6o The Method 
 
 odenum, fqueeze the Cyjiis Fellea, and ob- 
 ferve where the Bile ilTues out, or having 
 opened the Du(5l, trace its Paflage with a 
 Probe or Tube, which lies very near the 
 Pancreatick Dud, and fometimes ad:s the 
 Inteftines by the fame Paffage. You are al- 
 fo to take Notice of the VelTels belonging to 
 the Liver, by tracing their Entrance into its 
 Subflance with a Probe. It now remains to 
 fay fomething concerning the Separation of 
 thefe VelTels from the Parenchyma, before 
 I proceed farther. 
 
 This Operation is performed either in a 
 boiled or in a raw Liver, according to Plea- 
 fure. If a raw one, fcrape off the Paren- 
 chyma with a wooden Knife. The Operation 
 may be more eafily performed, if you will 
 let the Liver macerate a few Days in Water» 
 or not touch it till it begins to putrify ; but 
 becaufe every Part cannot be taken away at 
 once, you may macerate the Liver for an 
 Hour or two in the ftrongeft Vinegar, after- 
 wards take it out, and repeat your Operation 
 with a wooden Knife, till the whole Par en- 
 cbyma is taken off. I have found this Opera-?^ 
 tion fucceed befl in the Liver of Brutes. 
 
of dtfj'eBlng Bodies. 6i 
 
 They who perform the Operation in a 
 boiled Liver thus proceed ; firft, they boil it 
 for fome Time in Water, then take it out 
 of the Water, and beat it with a Stick, till 
 the Parenchyma comes off, and the Veffels 
 appear bare. If the Parenchyma ftill adheres 
 clofe to the VefTels, you are to macerate it 
 in Vinegar as above dired:ed, then beat it 
 again. Some bury a boiled Liver into an 
 Ant's Neft, which eat the Parenchyma, and 
 leave the VefTels untouched. If you put the 
 Veffels, when feparated, into clear Water, 
 you will have a fine Idea of all their beautiful 
 Ramifications and capillary Extremities, fwim- 
 ing on its Surface. 
 
 What has been faid of the Liver may be 
 applied to the Spleen, in order to feparate its 
 Parenchyma from the VefTels, therefore I 
 will ufe no Repetitions here. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
6% The Method 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Anus, Pe- 
 nis, ^;?^ Vesica Urinaria. 
 
 EG IN from the Skin, and make a 
 flreight Incifion along the Yard^ 
 which, when laid bare, you will ob-* 
 ierve the Vena Pudenda running along, and 
 fending forth Branches to the external Coat 
 of the 7ejies -, having feparated the Skin 
 from the Penis, cut it off near the GlanSj 
 then raife the Skin , of the Scrotum with the 
 Membrana Carnofa, which adheres here and 
 there to it ; afterwards pull back the Tejles^ 
 and feparate the Fibres clofely adhering to 
 them } but take care you do not touch them 
 with the Knife ; the Cremafter Mufcles are 
 very fmall, and run along the Outfide of the 
 T^unica Vaginalis. The T^ejles being feparated 
 from the Scrotum, lay them in the Abdomen 
 for farther Operation. Having opened the 
 Legs, make an Incifion in the Skin on either 
 Side, in the internal Part of the Femur, to 
 
 the 
 
of dijfe^hg Bodies. 6^ 
 
 the Podex, about which make a deep circu- 
 lar Sedion in the ufual Manner, that you 
 may fee the Fat about a Hands-breadth in 
 both Thighs. But to eafe yourfelf in this, 
 and prevent your too much flooping\ lay a 
 Brick under the Buttocks, then turning the 
 Perns upward out of the Way, begin \with 
 taking off the Fat, which mufl be very 
 carefully done, left you hurt the Mufcles in-* 
 volved in it 3 begin at the anterior Parts, hav- 
 ing feparated the Membranes and Fat, and 
 proceed toward the pofterior. The firftyou 
 then meet with is the Corpora Nervofa of the 
 Penis J arifing from the OJJa Pubis ; next, its 
 Mufcles lying under them, then the Sphindfer 
 Ani furrounding the Intejiinum Re5iti?n^ which 
 takes its Origine from the Os Coccygis. If 
 you rightly under ftand thefe, you may eali- 
 ly know after what Manner they are to be 
 differed, viz. Firft by making longitudinal, 
 then circular Sedlions, and taking off the Fat 
 all round the Fundament. If you have fe- 
 parated the Fat till the Mufcles plainly ap- 
 pear, thruft your Finger into the Anus^ and 
 pull it out to fee the Levat ores Ani ^lictd on 
 its Sides. If you cannot obferve them, they 
 muft be referved till you have taken out the 
 
 other 
 
64 The Method 
 
 other Parts, according to Galena Method^ 
 who thinks thefe Mufcles cannot be feen^ 
 unlefs the Inteftines are fir ft taken out, and 
 the Ojjo- Pubis feparated. 
 
 Afterward feparate the Mufcles of the 
 Penh', firfl the fuperior, arifing from the 
 Sphindter Ani, fuperior Part of the Urethra, 
 tke Os IJichium^ and the Ofj'a Pubis^ cal- 
 led by RiolaUy Acceleratores^ and cut them 
 off at their Origine. Then cut off the Ori^ 
 gine of the EreBores Penis, or fecond Pair 
 from between the Tubercle of the Ifichiiimi 
 and beginning of the Corpus Cavernofum, al- 
 fo from the whole Sphindfer Ant \ next, fe- 
 parate a Part of thefe Mufcles from the Ure- 
 thra, to come at the Sphincter Veficce^ which 
 is only a few fmall circular flefhy Fibres, 
 placed under the external Coat of the Bladder 
 round its neekj and ferving to fhut it 3 the 
 Demonftration whereof is fo eafy, that we 
 need not lay down Rules for its Adminiftra- 
 tion. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
of dijjdiing BoDliis. 6'^ 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Of the 'Method ofextracimg the Sper- 
 MATicK and Urinary Farts, 
 
 ' O U now begin with the Spermatick 
 VeiTels, which I deiired in the. pre-- 
 ceding Chapter to be referved in the 
 Abdonwi with the Tejies, and, following their 
 Canal, clear them from their Membranes to- 
 ward their Origine ; whether it be the 
 Trunk, or the Emulgents -, for Nature is 
 not always the fajjie here. The Ureters ly 
 under the Spermatick VefTels, which are 
 joined to them as they pafs the Teritonceum : 
 After having thruH: back the Ureters, take 
 out the Kidneys ; while you are extradling 
 the right, you place yourfelf on the left Side 
 of the Subjed, and while extrading the left, 
 on the right. You will have here little Oc- 
 cafion for a Knife, becaufe they are only 
 joined to the Loins by fome flender Fibres. 
 But while you are extracting the Kidneys^ 
 left you fliould forget the Glandules Succentu- 
 F riatce^ 
 
66 The Method 
 
 riatae, placed above, and adhering to the 
 Kidneys, near the Spine, you may take 
 them out with the Kidneys, and referve them 
 for their Preparation. You are alfo to di- 
 vide the Vena Cava from the Aorta^ that 
 lying a little under it, after having made two 
 Ligatures, tlien cut it afunder, and take 
 both out, but take Care while you are ie- 
 parating the Fat, that you do not take along 
 with it the fabjacent ladeal Branch. Thefe 
 Things being done, you are next to make 
 tv/o Ligatures on each iliac Branch defcend- 
 ing to the Legs, then cut them afunder be- 
 tween the Ligatures ; afterward feparate the 
 two Trunks of the Vena Cava and Aorta 
 from the Lumbar Vertebra^ and from the 
 faperior Parts, by beginning as was before di- 
 rected : But left the pendulous Kidneys break 
 their Veflsls, you muft hold them with your 
 Hand, then feparate the Lumbar Veins and 
 Arteries arifing from their Trunks. If you 
 have Time, it will be necelTary for you to 
 make Ligatures on them firfi. 
 
 Having now come to the Pelvis^ you are 
 thus to take out its containino; Parts ; Firil 
 cut off the Ligaments, which faflens the 
 Penis to the Synthefis of the OJJa Pubis, 
 
 feparate 
 
of dt'JeUlng Bodies. 6j 
 
 kparate the Corpora Nervofa of the Penis^ 
 and the Mufculi Acceleratores near the fame 
 Bones, and having pulled back the Fe7iis to* 
 ward the Anus, feparate every Part adhering 
 internally to the Ojja Pubis. You are alfo 
 to divide the OJJa Puhis^ by cutting through 
 the Cartilage uniting thefe Bones, either with 
 i. Sword-like, or thick back diifedting ICnife ; 
 but never attempt this Operation, till there is 
 itbcm enough in the Pehis for the Admiffion 
 of your Fore-finger *. You may, by Degrees, 
 widen this Filfure made before, without di- 
 ftorting the Bones, fo as to feparate from the 
 Os Sacrum, according to Galen's and Fernelius's 
 Opinion, lefl any one Part be bruifed or 
 broke. Through this Apperture put out 
 the Sperniatick VefTels, Ureters, with the 
 Kidneys, and feparate th€ Peritoneum from 
 the Edges of the Pehis ; the refl: may be 
 done by Excoriation ; the Bladder and Podex 
 may be exterminated through the former 
 Hole, being a little enlarged, and the re- 
 maining Fat cut oit at the Side, which ends 
 this whole Operation. However, all this 
 TimCy you are to abforb the Blood ilTuing 
 
 * Fernelius made ufe of a blunt Razor and a leaden Mal- 
 let 10 tut through this Cartilage, 
 
 F 2 out 
 
68 The M E T H o B 
 
 out of the Veilels with a Spunge, whicli 
 would otherwife prove troiiblefome during, 
 the Operation. 
 
 Having extraded thefe Parts, you are 
 next to feparate the Inteftmum Re5fum, be- 
 caufe it has no Relation widi any future 
 Preparation. If you could not before fee the 
 Levatures, you may now clear them of their 
 Fat, and take a View of them ; but as for the 
 Method of their Adminiftration, no- certain 
 Rules can be prefcribed. 
 
 , C H A P. X. 
 
 Of the 'Preparation of the Kidneys,. 
 Renal-glandSj ^/V^'Bladder. 
 
 ^ERNELIUS, treating of the Admi- 
 niftration of the Kidneys, fays, they 
 are beft to be done while remain- 
 ing in, and adhering to the Body ; for he,, 
 having msde a Ligature on the emulgent 
 Arteries and Veins, cuts them afjnder, then 
 takes out the Kidneys, and diifed-s them. 
 However, I think it better to take out the Kid- 
 
 ney,^ 
 
of oiijJ'cBhig Bodies. 69 
 
 neys with the Spermatick Veffcls, and pre- 
 pare them together j but how this Operation 
 is to be performed, it is my Biiiinefs to fhev/. 
 Having cut off a Part of the Inteftmum Rec~ 
 tii?n, and kid the other Parts on a Table 
 in their natural Situation, begin afterward 
 with the Kidneys. Make lirfl an Incifion 
 in the Tunica Adipofa^ v/hich alfo envelope 
 the lienes Succenturiati^ or CapfuL-e Atrahi- 
 laria, but take care not to cut off thefe with 
 the Membranes, becaufe they pretty much 
 refemble Fat in Colour ; therefore feparate 
 them at their Beginning, with their Arteries 
 and Veins, arifmg either from the Emul- 
 gents, or from the Trunks, and trace their 
 Cavities with a Probe. After makino; a Ion- 
 gitudinal Incifion along the Kidneys, fepa- 
 rate the Tunica AdipoJ'a^ and take it oft by 
 way of Excoriation ; but the Vefiels near the 
 Emulgents muft be cleared of the Fat, to 
 obferve their Diflribution and Progrefs. Tlie 
 fecond, or proper Coat of the Kidneys, mufl 
 be feparated fi-om the Parenchyma^ in the 
 fame Manner as you did the Splenick Mem- 
 brane j but it is fomewhat more difficult, on 
 account of its clofer Adhefion. When the 
 Emulgent Vein is opened and probed, you 
 F 3 will 
 
70 The Method 
 
 will fometimes fee a fingle Valve, fometlmes 
 a double one, and fometimes none at all. 
 Take hold next of the Kidney in yoar Left- 
 hand, in fuch a Manner as to turn the Infer- 
 tions of the VefTels toward the Palm of your 
 Hand, and divide the fuperior oppofite Side 
 in the Middle, by making an Incilion with 
 the Myrtle knife as deep as the Ureters. You 
 will here fee the papillary Caruncles and 
 Tubes, through which the Serum is diflilled 
 into the Ureter, whofe Beginning is the Pel- 
 vis. 
 
 You will here likewlfe obferve the Ureters 
 taking their Courfe from hence to the Blad- 
 der, enclofed by a Membrane from the Pe- 
 ritonceum^ which you are thus to feparate. 
 Take hold of the Head of the Ureter in your 
 Left-hand, and let your Afliftant hold the 
 Bladder, fo as to extend the Ureter ; then 
 introduce the diffedling Knife between the 
 Ureter and Membrane, toward the Bladder, 
 fo as to feparate the Tunic, which you may 
 afterward pull oif from the Ureter with your 
 Hand. 
 
 In preparing the Bladder, you are firfl 
 with the Knife to feparate its external Coat 
 fiom the Veritoncemn^ by beginning at the 
 
 Bottom, 
 
of diffcBlng Bodies. 71 
 
 Bottom, where vou are to take care not to 
 cut the Urachus. The Ureters under this 
 Coat cut the Bladder near its Neck, but to 
 fee their Entrance, both the Bladder and Ure- 
 ters muft be laid open. Introduce into the 
 Ureter a fmail Probe or Tube, and if you 
 inflate it, you will obferve the Orifice open- 
 ing within the Bladder, an(i the Wind or 
 Water jetting as it were between two Con- 
 duits or fmall Canals, which, when they 
 cling together, prevent the Return of the 
 Serum. You are aifo to take Notice of the 
 Sphincter Muscle of the Bladder, {i- 
 tuate before the Proftate Glands, and eafily 
 difcernible by its circular Fibres, when clean- 
 ed of its Membranes, therefore v/e need fay 
 po more Qf it. 
 
 F 4 CHAP» 
 
?72 YheJSi E T H O D 
 
 / 
 
 C H A p. XL 
 
 Gf the Pans o/' Generation h/ 
 
 Men. 
 
 ^ TOU are to begin with the Coats of the 
 - 1 Tefticles, therefore make firfl: an In- 
 cifion in that Coat v/hich is from the 
 TeritoncEumj and being joined to the Cre- 
 sPiafler Mufcle, inclofes the Teflicle, hence 
 denorninatedj fpurpsa^j^?, or Vaginalis. Af- 
 tei havinp- made a lorj8;itudinal Incifion in this 
 Coat J hrlt fepaiute it with ihe Knife from the 
 VeflelSj and then from the Tefdcles *. Hav- 
 ing removed the Coat, you will fee the Va- 
 SA Pr^ PAR ANT I A inclofed in a peculiar 
 Coat, v/hich muft be taken off, to fee the 
 mutual Anafiomojh of their VefTels. There- 
 fore, after having fpread this Coat with its 
 VelTeis on a Table, make an Inciiion, but 
 take care not to touch the fmall Branches of 
 the VefTels 3 then, either with the fliarp 
 
 * ?dol.a.n \youId have you tear off this Coat with Tcur 
 Fingers. 
 
 Point 
 
of dtfJdVtfig Bodies. 73 
 
 Point of a Knife, or v/Ith your Finger- 
 nails, fcrape, and take off as much as can bo 
 done. Separate next the Veins and Arteries, 
 united by their Fibrils. To divide all thefe 
 Branches, would be an endlefs Tafk j thercr 
 fore it is enough to do it with fome, or the 
 great Part of them. However, near the Te- 
 llicles, thefe Anaflomofes are not fo very 
 numerous, but many of thefe VefTels are in- 
 terwoven with one another like the Twift of 
 Vines, till they cut the Parajiat^^ hence cal- 
 led Corpus Fampiniforme. Thefe VefTels, when 
 full of Blood, are more confpicuous, and 
 make a more beautiful Appearance than when 
 empty. You need not fpend much Time in 
 preparing the Farafiata^ but only (hew, that 
 a very fmall Part of them is only capable of 
 being feparated from the Tefticle. But be- 
 fore you leave the Tefticles, I would have 
 you take a View of their third Coat, whicli 
 is almoft impoiTible to be feparated from the 
 Body of the Tefticle j ns for the Subflance 
 of the Tefticle, it is eafily difcovered, by 
 making an Incilion therein. 
 
 Vasa Ejaculantia convey the Eetnen 
 from the Tejies to the Vejiculce Semi?mles, 
 >vhich arQ in their Beginnings full of Wind- 
 
74 The Method 
 
 ino.s and Twiilings, hence denominated Cor- 
 pus Varicojmn & %;pcroe;Jv5; j if die exterior 
 Coat is removed, thefe Veffels may be far- 
 ther extended in Length. You fee in their 
 Progrefs a great many crooked and winding 
 Veins adhering to their external Side, Uke 
 thofe in tlie Circumvolutions of the Brain, 
 which mufl: be feparated with their Mem- 
 branes, or elfe they will intercept the Sight 
 of the Vas Defer e?is ; therefore thefe Veffels 
 mud be cleared of their Membranes as far 
 as their Extremities. Having removed thefe 
 Impediments, you will here find with your 
 Fingers the Situation of the Proftate Glands 
 adhering to. the Backfide of the Neck of the 
 Bladder. In the Middle, between thefe two 
 Glands, make an Incilion in the Membranes, 
 where you will fee a whiti/li Body, inter- 
 fperfed with red Veins, and thefe are the 
 Frojiatce^ which you are to clear of their 
 Membranes, efpecially on the Sides, where 
 you will fee the adjacent Seminal Bladders and 
 Spermatick Veflels. While clearing the Veji- 
 culce, or Bladders, of their Membranes, you 
 will cbferve feveral fmall Veins lying on them, 
 by which they are, as it were, divided into 
 :(b many fmall Cells. They are joined ta 
 
 the 
 
oj dilfeBhg Bodies. ^5 
 
 the Vafa Defcreittia, from whence they re- 
 ceive the Seed, and convey it into the Ure- 
 thra. To fee how this is done, open the 
 Vas Deferens^ and inflate it y^ith a Tube, 
 then you will obferve the Veficula fwelJ, 2n4 
 foon after difcharge theaifelves into the Vre- 
 thra ; that you may fee the Place, open the 
 Urethra, and you will obferve the fmall 
 Point of it fwelled, likewife feel the Air 
 coming through a very fmall Hole j for it 
 is a very fmall Opening in the Urethra that 
 affords the Seed a Paffage. 
 
 The Penis, belonging only to the Male, 
 and deligned for the Sake of Generation, re- 
 mains next to be examined. We have taken 
 notice of its Mufcles in Chap. VII. where 
 we have alfo fhewn how to feparate the Cu^ 
 tis and Membrana Carnoja, with the Pr^pii- 
 tiiim. By making a tranfverfe Sed:ion in the 
 Penis J you will fee its bodies made up of a 
 fpungy blackifh Subflance, and their ner- 
 vous Coat, without differing it ; in the Mivd- 
 dle they are conneded by a ftrong Liga- 
 ment *, therefore not eafily feparated. The 
 Urethra is almofl of the fame fpungy Sub- 
 
 t Spigeliiis makes it to be tranfparentj whicJi is more than 
 fver I could obferve. 
 
 . ' ' fiance 
 
^6 The Method 
 
 fiance with thofe that compofe it -, but it is 
 eafily feparated from them by making a lon- 
 gitudinal Sediion 3 however, its Separation is 
 of no great Moment. Its interior Surface is 
 very fmooth, to obferve which you need on- 
 ly open it with the differing Knife. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Of the Farts of GENERATION in 
 'Women. 
 
 OU may obferve the Parts in the 
 Fudendum, without uling a Knife, 
 'viz. the Mom Veneris^ with the 
 Hair growing on it, the Labia iituate on 
 both Sides of the Rima Magna ^ which, if 
 drawn a little afide, you will fee the Carun- 
 cidce Myrtiformes^ above the Extremity of the 
 Clitoris^ the Orifice of the Urethra, and the 
 Hymen, if not rent. But if you have a Mind 
 to go further, you muft make ufe of the 
 Knife thus : Having laid open the Legs, and 
 put a wooden Block under the Buttocks, 
 
 make 
 
of dJlfefiing Bodies. 77 
 
 make a longitudinal Incifion in the Skin on 
 each Side near the Fo/ja Magna^ to meet be- 
 hind the Foramen Am, which afterward fe- 
 parate, according to the above Dired:ions. Be- 
 fore you feparate the Fat, trace round the 
 Ligaments of the Womb, and fee whether 
 they are, according to Riolan, extended to the 
 Leg, or whether, as is generally obferved, 
 they end in the Os Pubis. Having made an 
 Incilion in the Peritoncewn, return from 
 the internal to the external Parts : Thefe be- 
 ing removed, cut off the thick Lump of Fat 
 in the Mons Veneris to the Bone, and fepa- 
 rate it about the Pudendum from the Os Coxce-, 
 if the Clitoris be very large and confpicuous, 
 you may take a View of its Bodies, which 
 are joined near the Contexture to the 0/fd. 
 Pubis, and at the Sides you may oblerve fome 
 carnous Fibres, which are reckoned the Muf- 
 cles of the Clitoris. But the abovementioned 
 Parts are fcarce viiible in a Child or new born 
 Infant. However, feparate them all from 
 the OJfa Coxa, to make a fmall Apperture to 
 the Infide ; then feparate the OJ/a Pubis with 
 a Knife as you did in the Male Siibjed:, like- 
 wife cut off the Fat round the Pulva and 
 Podex. 
 
 Having 
 
f 8 The Method 
 
 Having taken a full View of the natural 
 Situation of the Womb, you are next to 
 enter upon the Adminiftration of the inter- 
 nal Parts 3 firfl: free the 0-varia Vafa Frcepa- 
 rantia^ both Artery and Vein, likewife the 
 Ureters ; then make Ligatures on the Trunk 
 of the Artery and Vein, cut them afunder 
 above the Emulgents, and feparate them from 
 the Spine. If you intend to fearch for the Tho- 
 raie Dud:, take particular care not to hurt it 
 now, for it lies very near, as has been already 
 mentioned concerning the Kidneys. Having re- 
 moved the Kidneys and Capfulcs AtrabUari(^ 
 out of their Place, take them afide along- 
 with the other Veilels -, but when you come 
 to the Pehis, take care not to cut any o- 
 ther Yc^d^ except that which enters the Fo- 
 ramina of the Os Ldtum, or goes to the Fe* 
 nmr-^ for you may happen to cut the Ute- 
 rine Veins and Arteries. Having taken out, 
 through the FiiTure made in the Offa Fiibis^ 
 the VelTels, and what adheres to them, you 
 may feparate the remaining Parts in the Fel- 
 vis by way of Excoriation, and exterminate 
 them with the Fat. Separate next the Ft" 
 teftinimi ReBimi from the Neck of the Womb 
 to which it clofely adheres, therefore take^ 
 
 care' 
 
of difeSihig BODIES. 79^ 
 care not to wound it with the Knife ; then, 
 remove the remaining Fat round the Orifice 
 of the Womb, but do not touch the Clito- 
 ris. What is next to be done, and how 
 the Uterine VefTels are to be feparated, I 
 cannot dired; you by Words, nor will I take 
 upon me to lay down Rules for you to go 
 by '3 but I would earneflly recommend you 
 to the Pradice thereof, which will be your 
 beft Gride. However, I will give you a fevy^ 
 fhort Dirediions. Firft, every Part muil: be 
 removed that does not come under the De- 
 nomination of the VefTels of the Uterus and 
 Bladder. Next, after removing the Mem- 
 branes, begin from the greater, and proceed 
 to the leiTer Branches of the VeiTels. Laft- 
 ly, remove the Fat lying between the Vef- 
 fels, to fee their innumerable Divarications. 
 This is all that can be faid in general con- 
 cerning the Diffedlion of the Uterus, and 
 Words will not allow to be more particular; 
 therefore put your Hand to the Work, and 
 Pradice will befl direcfl you how to proceeds 
 Some Parts yet remain, which, before the 
 Womb is thrown away, and you proceed 
 further, muil be taken notice of. To come 
 at a full View of the interior wrinkled Sur- 
 face 
 
8a The Method 
 
 face of that Part of the Womb, its Neck,' 
 ■which adheres to the Intefiinum Reciimt, mufb 
 be" laid open, therefore, open in the Middle 
 the whole pofterior Part of the Vagina, as 
 far as the inner Mouth of the ¥/omb, which 
 is a more folid Subflance than the Vagina^ 
 and apt to give way to the Preffure of 
 your Hand. Having opened the Vagina, 
 you will fee the OriHce of the Matrix, re- 
 fembling a Fifh's Mouth, when open. The 
 Bottom of the Womb muft next be dif- 
 fered, to come at the Sight of its Inner Ca-= 
 vity. Some cut it open tranfverfely, others 
 longitudinally like the Vagina, but the lafl: 
 feems to me the miofc proper, i;/^;. Begin- 
 ning your inciiion in the fuperior Part of the 
 Womb, fo as to make a flreight Line with 
 the Corniia Uteri, and thus continuing your 
 Section to its Orifice, that the Womb may 
 be cut afunder in two equal Parts,- or near 
 it. Beiides the pinguous Subflance of the 
 Womb, you will here fee an infinite Num- 
 ber of fmall Foramina, being the Extremi- 
 ties of the dlffeded Veins of the Uterus, 
 which, if inflated with a Blow-pipe, you 
 will obferve reach the VefTels adjoining the 
 Qvaria, In the Middle of the Cavity of the 
 
 Uterus^ 
 
of dijJeSihig Bodies. 8i 
 
 tJterus, you will lee a Line owing its Rife to 
 the Vulva. 
 
 You are, after the Adminiftration of the 
 Uterus^ to cut open its Corn u A lengthways, 
 where you will meet with a fmall Nerve, 
 near the Bottom, very much cried up by 
 Riolaii. It is about three Fingers long, and 
 terminates in that great VefTel called the 
 Fallopian Tube, divided into feveral 
 Cells, being the Receptacles of a vifcous Hu- 
 mour^ almoft of the fame Nature with that 
 contained in the Ovaria^ which are next to 
 be cut open, to fee whether their contained 
 Fluid deferves the Name of Semen, 
 
 G BOOK 
 
8::, The Method 
 
 B O O K II. 
 
 Of the Thorax or Chest. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Common Integuments 
 a?2d Breasts. 
 
 THE common Integuments of the 
 middle Cavity claim the chief Place -, 
 the firil: of which is the Skin, whofe 
 Incifion is to reach as far as the Throat ; the 
 Skin is afterward to be divided bv another Sec- 
 tion, 'uiz. By beginning from the End of 
 the former Incifion, and proceeding in a 
 ftrelght Line above the Acromhim^ through 
 
 the 
 
■of dijje^hg Bodies^ 8j 
 
 the anterior Part of the Arm to half the 
 HwneniS'^ and this to be done on both Sides ; 
 then feparate the Skin from the Fat in the 
 iame Manner as has been direded in Book 
 1. Chap. I. 
 
 You here meet with the Breasts, which, 
 lying under the Skin, introduce fome Ake- 
 ration in this Separation. In Males, fcarce 
 any Subflance is to be found befides the Nip- 
 ples ; but in Females, a great many Parts 
 are to be obferved, efpecially in pregnant Wo- 
 men, or wet Nurfes , therefore^ while fe- 
 parating the Skin from the Breails, you are 
 to take Care of the Glands interfperfed among 
 the Fat. Having come to the Nipple, you 
 find a large Gland which is compofed of 
 many leiTer ones, to which there is a Con- 
 courfe of feveral lacteal Tubes. To preferve 
 thefe in railing the SkiUj make an Incifion 
 round the Nipple, and leave the Skin on the 
 Breail ; as for the reft, you may not only fe-* 
 parate the Skin on the Breaft, but alfo in 
 that Part of the Shoulder next it, to come 
 at the infertion of the pectoral Mufcle. Hav- 
 ing raifed the Skin, proceed to the Dilleclion 
 of the Fat in fuch a Manner as you did the 
 Skin J and clear it from the Flefli. Under 
 G 2 tba 
 
 y 
 
84 The Method 
 
 the Arm-pits, the Separation of the Fat Is 
 fomewhat difficult, becaufe it is there inter- 
 mixed with mufculous Parts; therefore it 
 muft be carefully fepaiated, for fear of cut- 
 ting the Veins which from thence defcend 
 into the Arms. 
 
 This is the Method of diffeding the Bo- 
 dy of a Virgin ; but if it be a Woman that 
 has Milk in her Breafts, you are to change 
 your Operation. You are to pull up the 
 Fat with a fmall Hook, which is deeply in- 
 termixed among the Glands, and cut off the 
 ftrong Fibres with the Point of a Knife ; you 
 may thus remove the Fat without hurting 
 the Glands, for it lies moft upon them. But 
 thefe Glands are immediately joined to the 
 perioral Mufcles by a peculiar Membrane, 
 which is pretty thick in wet Nurfes, and 
 hard to be feparated from the Glands, but 
 very eafy from the peroral Mufcle through 
 which the Veins take their Courfe to the 
 Breafts. If there is ftill remaining any Quan- 
 tity of Milk in the Breafts, you will obferve 
 the ladiferous Veins, or ladeal Tubes, eve- 
 ry where difperfed among the Glands, and 
 uniting at the Nipple, where they terminate 
 in thicker Branches. To difcover the Divari- 
 cations 
 
of di[JeFih/g BODIES. 85 
 
 cations of thefe Branches near thofe Pla- 
 ces where the Tubes are moft apparent, di- 
 vide the Skin lengthways carefully with the 
 Knife, and you will fee feveral fmall Branch- 
 es proceeding from a large Trunk, but you 
 muft take Care not to wound them ; be- 
 caufe, when deprived of their milky Juice, 
 they immediately difappear. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 O/'^^ Muscles upon /& Breast. 
 
 'NDER the Breafls lies the Mus- 
 cuLus Pectoralis, which arifes 
 from the Ckvicula, Sternum, . and 
 true Ribs, and is inferted a little below the 
 Head of the Humerus. To feparate this 
 Mufcle, you are neither to begin at its Ori- 
 gine nor Infertion, but from the inferior 
 Part under the Axilla, Having pulled the 
 Arm a fmall Diftance from the Body, make. 
 a flight Incifion in the Membrane which 
 joins the Mufcle to the Intercoilals, and put- 
 ting your Finger under, feparate it by way of 
 G 3 Excori- 
 
86 The Method 
 
 Excoriation ; but cut off its Origine with 
 the Knife, proceeding from the inferior to the 
 fuperior Part ; then feparate it from the Clavi- 
 cula and Deltoides^ with which it is joined in its. 
 Progrefs. When feparated, lay it afide over 
 the Arm *. Betwixt this and the Deltoides, 
 near the Extremity, ilTues out the' CephaUc 
 Vein, w^hich take Care of not to wound, 
 The fecond is the SuBCLAviys, fituate un- 
 der the Clavicula^ as its Name fliews. It 
 proceeds obliquely from the Clavicula to the 
 iirfl Rib j therefore, in diflediing this Muf- 
 cle, you are to feparate its Sides by an -ob- 
 lique Incilion, and then cut it off from the 
 Clavicula and firfl Rib. But take Care not 
 to hurt the fubjacent Blood Veffels. 
 
 Thirdly, the Intercqstales are Forty 
 four in Numbsr, and from the DirecStion of 
 their Fibjes, ^re divided into external and 
 internal. In the Adminiftration of thefe 
 Mufcles, you are to make a flight Inciflon, 
 following the Tradl of the Bone, fo as that 
 the Knife may not reach beyond one Half 
 of the flefhy Part, (for this is the only Way 
 
 * Gakn makes this a double A^ufcle, which is only a fin- 
 gle one, though there is a great Variety to be obferved iii its 
 Flefli, which, Plate-like, is laid iipon one another. 
 
of difeBhg Bodies. 87 
 
 to determine the Thicknefs of this Mufcle) 
 feparate the Flefh as far as dilTecfted, that 
 the intercoftal Space may be denudated, and 
 the contrary Direction of the Fibres of the 
 internal intercoftal Mufcle fhewn ; for that 
 which you iirft dillecfted, was the external 
 intercoftal Mufcle. The internal intercoftal 
 Mufcle adheres to the Pleura, which may 
 be feparated after the fame Manner, provid- 
 ing you do not hurt the Pleura, The In- 
 teftines between the Cartilages, feem to 
 have no Relation with the external interco- 
 ftal Mufcle, becaufe they have different Fi- 
 bres. 
 
 G 4 CHAP. 
 
88 The Method 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Method of opening the Tho-^ 
 
 RAX. 
 
 IN opening the Thorax^ Galen ufed a quite 
 different Method to what is now prac- 
 tifed. He divided the Os FeBoris with 
 a fharp Knife into two ; an Operation, which 
 is fcarce capable of being performed in an 
 adult Subjed, and attended with Uncertain- 
 ty and Trouble ; According to Ferneliiis \ 
 therefore^ We now open the Thorax^ by fepa-f 
 rating the Cartilages of the Sternum from the 
 Ribs, which Galen knew very well how to 
 do, though he divided the Os Fediorh in the 
 Middle. This Operation of feparating the 
 Cartilages from the Ribs, may be perform- 
 ed two different Ways, 'u/z. either by fe- 
 parating the Sternwn from the Diaphragm, 
 and leaving it adhering to the Clavicles, or 
 by cutting it off at the fuperior Part, and 
 leaving it fixed to the Septum Uranfverjiinh 
 
 The 
 
of elifeSikg Bodies. 89 
 
 The Operation fucceeds both Ways; In thq 
 firfi, the Cartilages and Ribs are to be fepa- 
 rated after the following Manner. Having 
 removed the Membranes, Mufcles and Fat, 
 find out the Union of the Cartilages and Ribs, 
 which is eafily done by the Difference of 
 their Colour ; for the Cartilages are of a whi- 
 tifh, and the Bones of a livid or cineritious 
 Colour ; then fix a fharp broad pointed 
 Knife between your Fore-finger and Thumb, 
 fo as that the Point may not exceed an Inch 
 beyond them ; afterward thrufi: the Knife 
 next the Rib into the Cartilage, and cut it 
 afunder. The fame Operation takes Place in 
 all the Ribs except the firft • For the Clavi- 
 cle muft be removed, before you can cut 
 the firfi: Rib ; therefore, cut off all the Muf- 
 cles which have their Origine above the Cla- 
 vicle, then feparate it with a Knife from the 
 Sternum, by making a finous Se<5lion accord- 
 ing to its Union, and turn it up to the Head, 
 which will bring you to the firfi; Rib ; but 
 take Care, while feparating the Clavicles, 
 you do not wopnd the Subclavian Branches, 
 left you fhould be forced to fpend Time in 
 making Ligatures» The Clavicle being laid 
 ^fide, find the Union of the firft Rib with 
 
 the 
 
 £ 
 
po The Method 
 
 the Cartilage * by its Motion ; then Aide your 
 Knife gently along under the Rib, turning 
 its Edge outward, to prevent wounding the 
 Subclavian VefTels. Having feparated the 
 Cartilages, make an Incifion in the interco- 
 jftal Mufcles and Pleura -y but if you incline 
 the Sternum (hould remain contiguous to the 
 upper Part, feparate it from the Diaphragm, 
 1HZ. By lifting up the Sternum on either Side, 
 and putting a Knife into the Cavity of the 
 "Thorax, divide the Septum from the Cartila- 
 ges of the fuperior Ribs ; which Section re- 
 peat on the other Side, and lay it over the 
 Face, after feparating the Membranes of the 
 Mediafiinum from the Cartilago Xiphoides. 
 
 If you intend to begin at the Throat, and 
 leave the Sternum adhering to the Diaphragm, 
 cut off the Mufcles from the fuperior Part 
 of that Boiie, but take Care not to hurt the 
 VefTels afcending to the Head, free the Mem- 
 branes, raife the Sternum^ feparate the Medi^ 
 (ijiinum as before, and turn down the Ster-^ 
 num upon the AhdoMen, If you incline to. 
 take the Sternum quite away, begin where 
 
 * It is here to be obferved, that the firft is longer than the 
 fecond Cartilage, contrary to what is apparent in the reft^,, 
 ^here the fliperigr is alway« the ftiorteft,. 
 
oj dijjetlijig Bodies. 91 
 
 you pleafe, and proceed with both the a- 
 bovementioned Operations. In the mean 
 Time, you may take a View of the Situa- 
 tion and Conned;ion of the Mediajiiniim^ be- 
 fore the Separation of the Sternum^ which 
 afterwards becomes flaccid, therefore not fo 
 vilible. On the Infide of the Sternum^ af- 
 ter removed, you may obferve the Mufculus 
 'triangularis. 
 
 To take a full View of the Contents of 
 the T^horax, Galen required a larger Apper^ 
 lure, therefore bended backward the adjoin- 
 ing Parts of the .Ribs to the Vertebra^ with 
 fuch a Force as to break fome of the Bones; 
 but there is no Need of this, fince the open- 
 ing made by the Separation of the Sternum 
 from the Ribs, is fufficient for that Inten- 
 tion, 
 
 CHAP, 
 
9 z The jM E T H O D 
 
 C H A p. IV. 
 
 ^ Of the Diaphragm, 
 
 IF you Intend to take a View of the na- 
 tural Situation of the Diaphragm, it 
 mufl be done before the Thorax is open- 
 ed, and after the Abdomen is cleared of its 
 Contents, in which you will fee two Fora- 
 mi?2ay and the Veffels difperfed through its 
 nervous Part, But when you defign to 
 feparate it , begin its Adminiftration in 
 the Cavity of the Thorax thus : On the 
 Right-fide, at a fmall Diftance from the 
 Kibs, deprefs the Diaphragm with the Palm 
 of your Hand, that the connediing Fibres 
 may be extended, and more eafily cut off 
 with the Point of the Knife. Repeat the 
 fame Operation on the Left-fide, and when 
 you cannot deprefs the DiaphragmN longer 
 with the Hand, take hold of it, and pull 
 it down with fuch a Force as to break the 
 extended Fibres -, but carefully feparate its two 
 tendinous Procefi^es, firmly adhering to the Spine, 
 
 oa 
 
 / . 
 
of differing Bodies. pj 
 
 on account of the fubjacent Thoraic Dadt, 
 which muft be carefully obferved ; there- 
 fore, the mofh convenient Method will be, 
 to lay the Diaphragm upon the Breaft, and 
 begin the DilTedion of its ProcefTes at the 
 prominent Bodies of the Vertebra, taking 
 Care not to feparate any Part of the Fat, 
 under which the Thoraic Dud lies conceal- 
 ed. Spread the Diaphragm, after taken out, 
 on a Table for a Demonflration. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Of the Method of extraB'mg the Con^ 
 tents of the Thorax. 
 
 ANATOMISTS generally expofe to 
 View the Water contained in the 
 Pericardium^ before they extrad; 
 the Vifcera out of the Thorax, therefore 
 take hold of the Pericardium with your 
 Hand, and make an Incilion large enough 
 to fee the Water, which you may either 
 take out with a Spoon, or fliew it in the 
 
 Peri' 
 
^4 'The Method 
 
 fericardmm, by removing the Apek of the 
 Heart a little afide. You may from thence 
 proceed to the Adminiflration of the Vifcera, 
 becaufe the Trachea Arteria^ and Tongue,- 
 are taken out along with the Contents of the 
 thorax. The Skin of the Neck muil: be a 
 little further feparated ; therefore make an 
 Incifion under the lower Jaw, reaching to 
 the Chin, and then feparate the Skin after 
 the ufual Method up to the Ears. In the 
 fame Manner remove the Fat, but take Care 
 not to hurt the Latiffimus Colli, which is a 
 ■ thin membranous Mufcle lying immediately 
 under the Fat ; feparate the Mufcidi Majioi^ 
 dei near their Origine, they being already 
 fuppofed to be cut off from the Sternum, 
 and lay them on both Sides ; then remove 
 the Mufcidi Sternothyriodei a little out of the 
 Way, to give Room for coming at the fub- 
 jacent Parts ; afterwards feparate carefully 
 the Mufculi CoracoUgoidei, which obliquely 
 extend to the Proceffiis Coracoides, and lay 
 them over the Larynx. 
 
 Having finiihed thefe preliminary Opera-^ 
 tions, and removed the Clavicle out of its 
 Place, feparate the Thymus from the Sides, 
 where it lies ve-ry deep, ^and adheres dole to 
 
 th© 
 
of di[feEi}ng BODIES. $ 5 
 
 the VefTels, bat take Care not to hurt the 
 Cava, which would caufe an Effuiion of 
 Blood; then clear the Axillary VefTels of 
 their Flefli and Membranes, and make two 
 Ligatures on each Veflel, at fame Diftance 
 from the Trunk. In the fame Manner pro- 
 ceed with the external and internal Jugulars 
 and Carotides, when feparated, (the farther 
 from the Trunk, and nearer to the Cranio 
 urn, the better) and then cut them all afun- 
 der. This is the common Way of proceed- 
 ing 3 but if you want to fee the Entrance of 
 the Thoraic Du(ft, make two Ligatures on 
 the Veins of the Left-fide, where the afcend- 
 ing Trunk begins to divide itfelf into Branch- 
 es 3 for this VeiTel terminates in the left fub- 
 clavian Vein, as has been already mentioned. 
 In order to take out the trachea Arteria 
 intire, which afcends to the Throat, come to 
 the lower Jaw, and firft fej^arate the Miifcidus 
 Digaftricus, creeping along the inferior Part 
 of it, from the Flefli with the Back of the 
 Knife, but not from the Bone ; then fepa- 
 rate the Mufcles of the Tongue and Os Hy- 
 goides clean from the interior Side of the 
 Maxilla inferior. When you come to the 
 Tunich of the Mouth, make an Incifion 
 
 therein 
 
<)6 The Method 
 
 therein near the Teeth of the lower Jaw, to 
 put your Fingers into the Throat, and pull 
 up the Tongue j in order to feparate its Muf-^ 
 cles arifing from the Os Styloides. To per- 
 form this Operation with greater Eafe, de- 
 lire your Afliftant to pull back the lower 
 Jaw with the Head as much as he can, and 
 keep them fteady while you are cutting out 
 the Uvula and Gula. At the fame Time^ 
 take out the Tonfils or Almonds, fituate at 
 the Sides of the TonguCj with the fixth Pair 
 of NerveSj which defcends into the Thorax, 
 This being done, pull out the Tongue, by 
 depreffing it with your Left-hand, and, with 
 a large Knife, fixed in a good Handle, cut 
 through the Memhrana Palati tranfverfely a~ 
 bove the JJiiula 3 then, fixing a fmall Hook 
 into the Extremity of the Skin where the 
 Incifion was made, and pulling back that 
 Membrane, feparate it from the adjacent 
 Parts, by which if you pull the Gida^ with 
 its adjoining Parts, they will eafily follow, 
 after the Fibres are cut with the Point of the 
 Knife which unite the Oefophagus to the Ver- 
 tehra. Continue this Operation till you come 
 to the third Vertebra of the BacJ^ where 
 the Vena Azygos^ or Sine Pari rifes out of 
 
 the 
 
of dtfj'eBing Bodies. 97 
 
 the Cava. On this Branch make two Li- 
 gatures, and cut it afunder between them ; 
 then turn toward the Abdomen^ and, becaufe 
 the intercoflal Arteries lie in your Way, you 
 may either make Ligatures on, or diredly 
 cut them off, till the Trunk of the Aorta 
 is quite clear. While you are feparating the Oe- 
 fophagtis or Aorta from the Spine, I would 
 advife you not to be too nice in removing 
 the Fat, left the Thoraic Dud (hould be 
 wounded. 
 
 After the Extradion of the Vifcera, the 
 Pleura is next to be feparated ; in order to 
 which, firft raife it from the Vertebra with 
 the Knife, then pull it from the Ribs with 
 your Hands, 
 
 H CH^AR 
 
98 The Method 
 
 C H A R VI. 
 
 Of the Method of preparing the Vis- 
 cera of the Thorax. 
 
 IN what Manner the Vifcera^ contained in 
 the Thorax, after taken out, may be 
 cleared of their fuperfluous Parts, can 
 rather be hinted at than defcribed by any 
 general Rules 3 however, I will endeavour to 
 lay down the Order by which you are to pro- 
 ceed in thefe Operations. Fir ft, cut off the 
 Oefophagiis, becaufe there is no farther Ufe 
 for it here 5 then feparate the Thymus in the 
 Fore-part, if not already done, from the 
 Veffels 3 afterward remove the Fat with the 
 ufelefs Membranes, and the Pericardium 
 likewife, that the Trachea Arteria may be 
 cleared of every Thing except its Mufcles, 
 and the VelTels of the Heart appear more vi- 
 iible when freed of their foreign Parts. But 
 obferve not to cut afunder the Dudius Arte- 
 riofus, which is only pervious in the Foetus, 
 and makes a Communication between the 
 
 Trunk 
 
of dijjeviir^g BODIES. 99 
 Trunk of the Aorta and Pulmonary Artery, 
 nor the Nerve of the lixth Pair, defcending 
 along with the Trachea, 
 
 The Anatomy of the Heart comes next 
 This you are to take in your Hand, and 
 hold it with the Apex uppermoft, which 
 mufl be cut off about the Breadth of an 
 Inch, to fhew the Diverfity of the Ventri- 
 cles. Then, having cut open the right Ven- 
 tricle and Auricle longitudinally, obferve the 
 three Valves called Tricufpides^ fituate between 
 the Auricle and Ventricle, like wife the ten-^ 
 dinous Ropes, which failen them to the 
 flefhy Pillars of the Heart, and ferve, when 
 the Point recedes from its Bafe, to fhut 
 the Valves upon the Entrance of the Blood ; 
 you are to take a View of the different 
 Surfaces of the Auricle and Ventricle j 
 alfo trace with a Probe the Pulmonary Artery, 
 and its Entrance into the Lungs, and after- 
 wards cut it open, to fee the three femihmar 
 Valves^ placed near its Union with the Ven- 
 tricle. 
 
 The Adminiftration of the left Ventricle is 
 the fame with that of the right, except at 
 the Entrance of the Ventricle, near the Pul- 
 monary Vein I it has only two Fakes, called 
 H 2 Mitrales, 
 
100 The Method 
 
 Mitrales, and near the Aorta three femilunar 
 Vahes. In a Fcetus, you are alfo to obferve 
 the Anajiomofis of the Caija and Pulmonary 
 Vein, by Means of the Foramen Ovale, near 
 the Entrance of the Cava into the Heart, 
 with a Valve annexed to it for hindering the 
 Return of the Blood ; likewife the DuBus 
 A?'t€riofus, or a communicating Canal be- 
 tween the Pulmonary Artery and the Aorta, 
 whofe Diameter will only admit of a fmall 
 Probe J but this Canal, with the Foramen 
 Ovale, are afterwards fhut up. 
 
 After the Heart you are to enter upon the 
 Lungs, and the firft Thing to be taken in 
 hand is the Diffeiftion of the Parenchyma -, 
 in which make an Incilion at the Entrance 
 of the Trachea, with its Ramifications, into 
 the Lungs, and, following the Trad of the 
 Trachea, feparate it where the Blood Veifels 
 keep clofe to the Rings ; * likewife take no- 
 tice of the Anmdi and Larynx, which you 
 will fcarce get a Sight of before they are 
 cleared of their Mufcles. 
 
 * Highmore has given us a very exa<R; Delineation of it j 
 but whether he made ufe of the fame Method of Separation, 
 is to be doubted. 
 
 CHAP. 
 
of diffe^ihg Bodies, ioi 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Larynx^ 
 Os Hyoides, and Tongue. 
 
 BECAUSE the Larynx, Os Hyoides, 
 and T^ongue, are connected with the 
 Afpera Arteria, the Method of dif- 
 fering their Mufcles are to be defcribed in 
 this Chapter. Thefe Mufcles are very nu- 
 merous and minute, therefore it is ealier to 
 /hew their Anatomy, than to explain it by 
 Words. If you intend to enter upon their 
 Adminiftration, you mufl ftrft get acquaint- 
 ed with their Number, Names, and Figure, 
 from fome exad: Anatomical Author, fuch as 
 Eiiftachiiis, &c. and then attempt their Se- 
 paration in the following Order. Firil, re- 
 move the Glands fituate at the Root of the 
 Tongue, and referve them for Demonftra- 
 tion, if intended j then do the fame with 
 the other Glands adhering to the Trachea^ 
 near the Annular Cartilage, alfo the ufelefs 
 Membranes ; afterward raife in the anterior 
 H 3 Pait^ 
 
102 The Method 
 
 Part, according to the following Order, the 
 MiifciiU Caracohyoideiy Siernohyoidei^ Sterm- 
 thyroidei, Hyothyroidei , Cricothyroidei^ Thyro- 
 arythcenoidei, ■ and Cricoarytanoidei laterales^ 
 which two laft you may fee in their natural 
 Situation. 
 
 Thefe Mufcles lie all under the Os Hyoi- 
 des J above which, firft feparate the Geniohy^ 
 cid(zi Exienii, with the Geniohyoidcei Internty 
 or GeniogloJjt\ then the Ceratogloffi, fiom the 
 Corfina of the Os Hyoides^ and the BafiogbJJi 
 from its Bails, having likewife feparated the 
 Stylocerafohyoidai from the StylogloJJi, which 
 are inferted into the SideSj you may take out 
 the Tongue. Having inverted and cleaned 
 the Trachea^ you will obferve the Arytcz- 
 noidcsi , and the Cricoarytanoidcei pojlici^ 
 which you may either raife, or let alone. 
 
 You now come to the Preparation of the 
 Tongue, for obferving its Nerves^ Blood 
 Vejjeh, 2A-\di four Fair of Mufcles. Firft, fe- 
 parate the StylogloJJi, iituate on both Sides of 
 the Tongue ; next to thefe, the Myloglofji^ 
 diftingoiilied from the former only by the 
 Diredion of their Fibres ; then the Cerato-^ 
 ghjji,. and laflly, the B.afoghji, in the Mid-= 
 
 die 
 
of diJJeSiing Bodies. 103 
 
 die of the Tongue. You may difled the 
 Nerves and Blood Veflels, to fee beautiful 
 Ramifications 3 afterward make an Incifion 
 crofs the Tongue, in order to examine its 
 Subflance, which is very foft. 
 
 H 4 BOOK 
 
I04 'Tfje Method 
 
 BOOK III. 
 
 ()f the Head. 
 
 CHAP. L 
 
 Of the I N T E G U M E N T s of the 
 Head. 
 
 "^HE Integuments of the Head are the 
 Hair, Skin, Pericraniumy Periofteutriy 
 and the Skull. I have already deiired 
 the Body to be fhaved all over, and the fame 
 muft be done w^ith reipe(5l to the Head. 
 
 Make a crucial Incifion in the Skin in 
 form of a St. Andrews Crofs > begin your 
 firft Jncifion at the Root of the Nofe, crofs 
 
 the 
 
of dilfe£iing BoDIKs. 105 
 
 the Vertex^ and terminate in the Neck j af- 
 terwards begin your fecond in the Maftoide 
 Procefs behind the Ears, and end it in the 
 fame Place, on the oppoUte Side. Take 
 Care your Knife do not go deeper than the 
 Skin, and cut the Pericranium. After the 
 Incifions are made, you can here more ea- 
 iily Jfeparate the Skin than in any other Part 
 of the Body, becaufe there is very httle or 
 no fubjacent Fat ; if there is, it mufl be rai- 
 fed with the Skin, becaufe the Hairs are 
 rooted iir it. In fome Places, feveral Muf- 
 cles lie immediately under the Skin ; as thofe 
 on the Forehead, behind the Ears, on the 
 Nofe, Mouth, and Eyes ; to which a parti- 
 cular Care muft be had in raifing the Skin. 
 
 The Skin being taken off, and laid afide, 
 make a crucial Inciiion in the Pericrani- 
 um, which muft be done with a light Hand, 
 for fear of wounding the Periofteum ; then 
 raife the Pericranium gently, and feparate its 
 Fibres from the Periofleum as far as you 
 think proper. 
 
 In the fame Manner make an Inciiion in 
 the Periosteum as you did in the Pericra- 
 nium^ and gently raife it from the Skull with 
 the Back of your Knife, to keep it intire. The 
 PilTedion of the Skull will be fhewn hereafter. 
 
 * CHAP. 
 
io6 The Method 
 
 C H A R II. 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Face. 
 
 iHE frontal Mufcles are the firft to 
 be feen after, the Skin is raifed, and 
 the Method of diftinguifhing them 
 is by beginning above, and feparating them 
 from the Skull, till you come to the Orbit of 
 the Eye. The other Mufcles of the Face 
 muft alfo be laid bare before you can difcover 
 their Situation : Make therefore an Incillon 
 in the Skin along the Ridge of the Nofe and 
 Middle of the Lips, then carefully feparate 
 it on account of the fubjacent Mufcles. When 
 you raife the Skin from the Eye-lids, do not 
 touch the Hair, that you may afterward fee 
 the Tunica Adnata to greater Advantage. 
 Having removed the Skin, the Orbicularis of 
 the Eye- lid requires no farther DifTedion, 
 unlefs it be to feparate it in the inferior Part, 
 where it adheres to the above, than the Tri- 
 angularis lituate on each Side of the Nofe. 
 The, other Mufcles belonging to the Nofe are 
 
 fo 
 
of dijJeBmg Bodies. 107 
 
 fo very fmall as not to be difcernible, except 
 it be in thofe who are furnifhed with large 
 Nofes. 
 
 Before you enter on the DifTediion of the 
 Labial Mufcles, the Fat muft be carefully 
 removed, to avoid hurting thefe fmall Muf- 
 cles. There are two Mufcles which pull up 
 the Lip, one arifing from the Mala^ the 
 other from the Oj Jugak, called by Riolan, 
 Zygomaticus. Under thefe lies a pretty broad 
 Mufcle forming the Cheek, hence denomi- 
 nated Buccinator. There is a Mufcle which 
 furrounds the Mouth like a Ring, and 
 from its Ufe, which is to conflringe, or draw 
 both Lips together, is termed Sphi?iSfer La-~ 
 biorum. This Mufcle is eafily known from 
 its circular Fibres. It is not neceflary to in- 
 lift upon fhewing the Method of diffediing 
 thefe Mufcles, becaufe, if you follow the 
 Courfe of their Fibres, they will diredt, and 
 prevent you from committing any Miflake, 
 
 CHAP. 
 
io8 The Method 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Low br 
 J ^ w. 
 
 "^HE Lower Jaw, on account of Ma- 
 llication, is furnifhed with feveral 
 moveable Mafcles, which I intend 
 to mention here, becaufe the Crotaphite Muf- 
 cle mufl: leave its Situation before the Skull 
 can be opened; you are therefore firft to 
 raife from the Neck the Flotyfma Myodes, io 
 called by Gale?2, and by Riolan, the Latiji- 
 miis Colli ^ and leave it adhering to the Edge 
 of the lower Jaw, near the Angle of the 
 Mouth, where it is infer ted. You are next, 
 after removing the Parotide Gland out of the 
 Way, to raife the MaJJeter Mufcle, lying up- 
 on the pofterior Part of the Maxilla^ which is 
 done by feparating its anterior Part from the 
 Bone, and then leaving it adhering to the 
 lower Jaw. 
 
 This done, you now come to the I'empo-- 
 ral Mufcle, Part of which lies under the 
 
 Maffeter^ 
 
of di[Je5iing Bodies. 109 
 
 Majjeter^ but the Os Jugale muft firft be re- 
 moved, before you can enter upon the Ad- 
 miniftration of this Mufcle ; therefore the 
 Os Zygomaticum mult be twice fa wed through 
 acrofs 3 once near the Eye, and then again at 
 the Maftoide Procefs. The Part cut oiF by 
 thefe Se(ftions, muft firfl be feparated from 
 the Mufcle, and then removed ; afterward 
 raife the Temporal Mufcle from the Skull ; 
 but take Care, while you are about this 
 Operation, not to hurt the Temple Bone, 
 (which is only a thin Scale laid over Part of 
 the Os Sincipitis.) When the Mufcle is thus 
 /eparated, it will adhere to the Coronoide 
 Procefs of the lower Jaw, that being the 
 Place of its Infertion. 
 
 The lower Jaw muft next be fawed longi- 
 tudinally through the Middle, which Sedion 
 mM^ fall between the De?ifes Incifbres, exad- 
 1}' performed. When both Parts of the Jaw- 
 bone, thus feparated, are drawn alide, you 
 will fee in the interior and inferior Part of 
 fh.is Bone the Digaftric Muicle, whofe 
 middle Tendon generally periorate? tlie 
 Stykceratohyoidem , of which already in 
 Chap, VII, Book 11. Raife the Digafiri- 
 
 CliS 
 
no The Method 
 
 ais * at its Infertion Into the Edge of tlid 
 lower Jaw, near its CommilTure above the 
 Mylohyoidceus^ and cut it off at its Origine, 
 from the Sides of a remarkable Sulcus exca- 
 vated internally, near the Root of the Ma- 
 fl:oide Procefs. 
 
 If the Head be feparated from the Trunk, 
 you need not difTedl the Jaw^ becaufe, by 
 turning the Head upfide down, you mayea- 
 lily perform this Operation, providing you 
 take Care before hand not to remove the 
 Mufcles of the Head and Neck. 
 
 There remains the two Pferygoidei Interni 
 and Extemiy which agree in their Progrefs 
 and Infertion, but differ in their Origine ; the 
 former arife from the external, and the lat- 
 ter from the internal Part of the Pterygoide 
 Procefs : Therefore, in feparating them, you 
 need only take Care to diftinguifli them from 
 each other -, and_, in order to this, after hav- 
 ing removed the Crotaphite Mufcles, deprefs 
 the Jaw-bone a little, and cut it out, then 
 cut off from the Bone the external Pterygo- 
 ide Mufcle, which is much leiTer than the in- 
 
 * Bartholinp, calls this Mufcle Graphoides. 
 
 ternal 
 
of differing BODIES. iii 
 ternal one, and feparate it from its Fellow. 
 You will now fee the internal Pterygoide 
 Mufcle adhering to the Infide of the lower 
 Jaw, and you may feparate it in the fame 
 Manner as the MaJJeier was done. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 0/^//j^ Dissection of the Skull, 
 
 rTTMIE DiiTedtion of the Skull is not al- 
 I ways performed after the fame Man- 
 ner. The Ancients ufed one Me- 
 thod, ufually called the Common Method^ or 
 ^e5iio Vulgaris -, and Confianthis Variolus con- 
 trived another, which is denominated, from 
 its Inventor, SeBio Variolana, I will begin 
 with a fhort Explication of the firifl, and 
 then fay fomething concerning the laft. 
 
 T:he 
 
1 1 % The Method 
 
 The Common Method, 
 
 In order to make an equal and flreight 
 Sedien, tie a double Thread round the Skull 
 in a flreight Direction, without bending ei- 
 ther upward or downward -, let it reil upon 
 the Frontal Bone, a little above the Orbit of 
 the Eye, bring it round the Temple Bone 
 to the Occiput^ and there pafs it over the 
 lamboidal Suture, about two Inches Diftance 
 from the End of the fagittal Suture 3 from 
 thence bring it over the Temple Bone on the 
 oppofite Side, and to the fame Place of the 
 Frontal Bone, above the Orbit of the other 
 Eye, and then fallen it 
 
 When the double Thread is thus tied 
 round the Head, make, with a fharp-pointed 
 Knife fuch an Incifion in the Skull, be- 
 tween the two Threads, as may ferve for a 
 Mark or Line to dire(fl the Saw in cutting 
 through the Skull. But the Head being of 
 a fpheroidal Figure, you muft have an Affi- 
 flant to hold it fleady during the Operation. 
 Even thofe who draw the Saw with one 
 Hand, ought to put the other againfl the 
 Head. But to make the Operation eafier, I 
 
 have 
 
of dijje^iing BODIES. 113 
 haVe contrived an Inftrament that holds it 
 fo very tight, that it can move to neither Side. 
 See its Strudure in the foUov^ing Plate. 
 
 Unite the Threads now, and cut the Skull 
 round with fuch a Saw as is commonly made 
 ufe of in Amputations. Perhaps it may be 
 expecfled I fhould here lay down Rules how- 
 deep the Saw muft enter ; but as the Skull 
 is not of the fame Thicknefs in all Bodies, 
 nor in every Part of it, it is therefore very 
 difficult to confine you to certain Rules : 
 However, I would advife you not to ufe 
 your Saw with too much Violence, but to 
 pull it gently backward and forward, and 
 now and then to take it out, to try with the 
 Knife whether the Bone is cut through 5 if 
 it is not, you are to go on with your Opera- 
 tion till it is, which you may difcover by the 
 crackling Noife. Continue your Diffediion 
 round the Skull, ftill keeping in your Mark 
 or Line, till you come to the Place where 
 you firfl: entred the Saw. Some Parts of the 
 Skull can fcarce be cut through with a ftreight 
 Saw without hurting the Meninges of the 
 Brain ; therefore I think it more convenient, 
 on this Account, to ufe a Saw whofe Blade 
 is crooked, in Form of a Crefcent j but I 
 I leave 
 
114 The Method 
 
 leave it to eveiy one's Pleafure, whether he 
 will choofe this Method, or rather ufe the 
 Knife, where the Saw cannot fafely reach- 
 Two Perfons fhould be employed in perform- 
 ing this Operation with the Saw, one topuili 
 it forward, and another to pull it backward, 
 that it may not (hift its Place, efpecially if 
 it happen to be of a pretty large Size, which 
 then cannot be managed with that Exadlnefs 
 it ought to be by one Perfon. 
 
 When the Skull is fa wed round, it muft 
 be thus feparated ; introduce an Iron Spatula, 
 6r fuch like Inftrument, into the FifTure 
 made by the Saw, to break the fmall Splin- 
 ters of the Bone where the Saw has not gone 
 through, and the ftrong Fibres wherewith 
 the Dura Mater is faftened to the Skull ; for 
 though the Skull be quite through, yet it re- 
 quires a confiderable Force to pull off its fu- 
 perior Part, becaufe it is firmly connedicd to 
 the Dura Mater, by Means of Membranes 
 and Blood Veffels. 
 
 If yeu intend the Head for a publick De- 
 monftration, the neateft Way to perform the 
 Operation, is by leaving it on the Trunk, 
 and fawing round the Skull as above diredled. 
 That the Verteic may not incline from Side 
 
of dt^eEltng Bodies. 115 
 
 to Side while you are employed in the Ope- 
 ration, it muft therefore be held Heady by an 
 Affillant i which being too laborious, I have 
 contrived a Machine, which being put un- 
 der the Head, holds it fo high as to make 
 the DifTedion of the Brain eafy to the Ana- 
 tomift. See the following Plate. 
 
 77:^^ Varolian Method. 
 
 This is managed after a quite different 
 Method to the former ; for he fo takes off 
 the fuperior Part of the Skull, that the in- 
 ferior, where the Nerves lie, may firft pre- 
 fent itfelf to View, which is thus done. 
 Take off the frontal Mufcles, with thofe of 
 the Head and Neck, fo clean as not to leave 
 a carnous Fibre behind them, feparate next 
 the Head from the Vertebrce, when this is 
 likewife cleared of its Flefh, after the fol- 
 lowing Manner -, bend the Head forward, 
 cut through the fpinal Marrow, disjoint the 
 Bones, and cut through the Membranes 
 and Ligaments that unite them, then take 
 out the Eyes, of which more in Chap. VIII. 
 You will now want a Saw, which muff be 
 ufed after the fame Manner as above direded, 
 I 2 but 
 
ii6 The Method 
 
 but fixed in another PlacCj which is the only 
 Difference betwixt this and the preceding 
 Diffedion of the Skull. Fix therefore the 
 Saw fo at the Root of the Nofe, that the Sec- 
 tion may be made above the Orbits of the 
 Eyes, and over the mamillary Proceffes to 
 the Occiput. If you can hit the fuperior La^ 
 mina of the Orbit, the Operation is exactly 
 done, but if you cannot make an Incifion 
 in the hamina, then, juil: behind the above 
 mentioned Proceffes, make another, and con- 
 tinue it on both Sides to the great Foramen 
 of the Occipital Bone. The Skull being thus 
 divided, put your Finger, or a fmall Hook, 
 into the anterior and inferior Part of it, then, 
 raifing it up, feparate the Dura Mater with 
 the Knife from the Bone 3 but if you find 
 any Difficulty, make an Incifion in the faid 
 Membrane along with the Bone, and cut off 
 the Nerves and Blood Veffels clofe to the 
 Bone, the inferior Part of the Skull will af- 
 terward eafily come away. But if you want 
 a fuller Account of the Method of perform- 
 ing this Operation, fee Spigel. Corp, Human, 
 The Skull being, by this laft Method, ren- 
 dered unfit for the offeological Demonfira- 
 tions, makes me therefore choofe the firft 1 
 -- which. 
 
of dtfjeBhig Bodies. 117 
 
 which, with a fmall Variation, fo removes 
 the Bones of the Vertex^ that the Brain can 
 be taken out and demonftrated on the oppo- 
 fite Side. The only Difference confifts in 
 this, that the circular Sedion fhould be im- 
 mediately begun above the Orbits, and from 
 thence continued towards the great Foramen 
 of the occipital Bone. The fuperior Part of 
 the Skull being taken off, feparate the Tiiira 
 Mater according to the Diredions given in the 
 next Chapter. Lift up the prominent or an- 
 terior Part of the Cerebrum^ cut off the Point 
 of the Falxj with the firft, fecond, and third 
 Pair of Nerves, clofe to the Bone, and fo 
 with the refl in their Courfe. You fome- 
 times lift up the Cerebrum on one, and fbme- 
 times on both Sides, and cut off the Nerves 
 pafling through the lateral Foramina of the 
 Skull. Raife up the poflerior Part of the 
 Cerebrum^ lay the Falx a little afide, and cut 
 off that Part of the T>ura Mater which di- 
 vides the Cerebrum from the Cerebellum^ by 
 beginning your Sedion at the Falx^ and car- 
 rying it on to the Occiput \ but if not large 
 enough, make another crofs it. You will 
 thus be able to take out the Cerebrum intire, 
 which you may afterward prepare for a De- 
 I 3 monftra- 
 
1 1 8 The Method 
 
 monflration according to the Varolian Me- 
 thod, as fhall be fhewn in the feventh Chap- 
 ter. 
 
 CHAR Vo 
 
 Oj the Admm'tfiration of the Me Mr? 
 BRANES of the Brain. 
 
 f^ I^HE Membranes of the Brain are two, 
 I r/:^. The Fia and Dura Mater 3 but 
 the laft comes only under a Diflec- 
 tion ; the firft, on account pf its clofs and 
 immediate Connexion withj and its various. 
 Infmuations into all the Circumvolutions of 
 the Brain, cannot be feparated from it. The 
 Subftance of this Membrane, which is ex- 
 tended round the Nerves like a Cobweb^ 
 may be feen after the Brain is taken out. 
 It is therefore the Dura Mater which 
 comes under the Knife, in which you will 
 fee a great Number of minute Blood Veffels 
 iiTuing out Blood while the Skull is taking 
 off; Having obferved thefe Veffels, make an 
 Incifion on each Side of the Falx in the Du* 
 
of dijje^iing Bodies. 119 
 
 ra Mater, but not in the Middle, on account 
 of the longitudinal Sinus and Falx under it ; 
 infert into this Incilion a (harp-pointed Pair 
 of ScifTars, and cut through the Membrane 
 both backward and forward, as far as you 
 can reach with the Points of the SciiTars. Re- 
 peat the fame Operation on the other Side of 
 the Falx ; afterward make another Incifion 
 in each Side of the Membrane, from about 
 the Vertex to the Ear, and thus you will di- 
 vide the Dura Mater into four Parts, which 
 turn down upon the Sides. 
 
 The Falx, which is a Dupiicature of the 
 Dura Mater, divides the Cerebrum into two 
 Parts, and adheres anteriorly to the Crifla 
 Gain, from which it muft be feparated, and, 
 after having torn afunder the minute Blood 
 VefTels which join it to the Cerebrum, turned 
 down upon the Occiput, while you are d\{~ 
 fedting the Cerebrum. You are next to trace 
 the Sinus's of the Falx, which are two, one, 
 or the lefTer, running along its inferior Edge j 
 the other, or greater, upon its fuperior Edge 
 to the Torcular. DilTed: this Falciform, or 
 Sythe-like Membrane, at the Extremities of 
 each Side, by an oblong, and fomewhat ob- 
 lique Incilion^ and trace its larger Sinus with 
 I 4. a Probe^ 
 
I20 The Method 
 
 a Probe, which, when found, lay it open 
 with a Knife or a Pair of ScilTars. If you 
 diffedt the inferior Sinus in the Middle, and 
 inflate it with a Blow-pipe toward the ante- 
 rior Part, you will, by the Immiffion of the 
 Air, obferve feveral Divarications or Branch- 
 es, which make a Communication between 
 the inferior and fuperior Simis, The upper 
 Sinus continues its Courfe till it meets with 
 the reft, and fo conftitutes Part of the Torcii- 
 lar J you are therefore to purfue the Courfe 
 of this Sinus as far as the Probe will go, 
 with going to either Side in your Inciiion, 
 which will dired: you to the other three Si- 
 nus's ; one going in a freight Line with the 
 former for fome fmall Space toward the Fo- 
 ramen Magnum of the occipital Bofie ; the o- 
 ther two lituate at the Sides oppofite to eacho- 
 ther, which muft be feparated with the Knife 
 like the larger Sinus of the Fah. Having 
 traced their Extremities, you will find them ' 
 terminate in the internal Jugulars ; hence it 
 appears, that thefe Cavities are only certain 
 Dilatations of the Jugular Veins, which here- 
 about degenerate into Membranes. 
 
 A farther Obfervation is yet to be made of 
 the Dura Mater. n)iz. That it does not adhere 
 
of dtf^eBhg Bodies. 121 
 
 alike to all Parts of the Skull ; for on the fu-^ 
 perlor and lateral Parts it is only joined by fome 
 minute Blood Veffels and Fibrils, therefore in 
 thefe Places more eafily feparated -, but it ad- 
 heres fo firmly in its inferior Part, as not to be 
 feparated without being torn in Pieces. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Of the common Method of dTJjetilng 
 the Brain, 
 
 ANATOMISTS dilTea: the Brain 
 three different Ways ; fome, in I- 
 , mitation to Varolius^ begin at the O- 
 rigine of the Nerves ; others at the fuperior 
 Part, and difled either the whole Cerebrum^ 
 or one Side of it, according to Fr. Sylvius. 
 
 The common Method is firft to feparate 
 the Falx from the Crifta Gallic then from 
 the Sides of the Cerebrum^ and lay it back 
 towards the Neck -, afterwards cut off, at one 
 Sedion, with a broad fine Razor, a Piece 
 from the Cerebrum ^ about two Inches Breadth, 
 
 ta 
 
122 The Method 
 
 to come at the Ventricles : but the lar^eft 
 Part muft be cut off towards the Occiput^ for 
 there the Ventricles lie deepeft. In this iirft 
 Incifion you will obferve minute Blood Vef- 
 fels through the Subftance of the Brain Uke 
 red Points ; but if you do not yet fee the 
 Ventricles, make another Incilion, and cut 
 off by Degrees thin Slices of the Brain, till 
 you come at them, which will firft make 
 their Appearance in the anterior Part of the 
 Brain, becaufe they are there placed fome- 
 what higher than any where elfe. If, by 
 making a tranfverfe Section, you difcover a 
 fmall Apperture, trace its Courfe toward the 
 anterior and pofterior Part of the Cerebrum -, 
 that Part which goes towards the Forehead, 
 is about two Inches Diftance from its Extre- 
 mity, and that which points to the Occiput re- 
 fiefts toward the Forehead -, but it forms firfl 
 a Kind of a hollow, like a Sulcus, in the Oc- 
 ciput, about an Inch diftant from its Extre- 
 mity, fo that the Length of this Cavity is a- 
 bout two Hands-breadth. It afterward re- 
 turns along the external Side to the anterior 
 Parts, from whofe Extremity, toward the 
 Os T^empQris, it declines about an Inch ; it 
 always goes deeper and deeper, fo that above 
 
 the 
 
of diffetlhig Bodies. 123 
 
 the Os Petrofum, near the PalTage of the au- 
 ditory Nerve, where the Ventricle termi- 
 nates, the Brain, under the Ventricle, is on- 
 ly about the thicknefs of a Pea, or an eighth 
 Part of an Inch ; hence it is that you are to 
 cut off a larger Portion of the Cerehru7n on 
 the Sides than near its Middle, where the 
 False is fituate : For under the Falx lies the 
 Fornix, or that white Body, which, being 
 built like an Arch upon the third Ventricle, 
 divides the lateral Ventricles. This may be 
 gut off, if you thruft your Knife pretty deep, 
 and cut off in the Middle a greater Portion of 
 the Subftance of the Cerebrum. That Part, 
 which is in the Middle, between the Sides of 
 each Ventricle, and inclofed, as it were, by the 
 furrounding Ventricle, is called the Corpus 
 Callofim, to whofe Sides is joined the Plexus 
 ChoroideSj arifmg at the End of the Ventricle 
 from the Carotide Artery, with fome adjacent 
 Glands, and taking its Courfe round the Cor- 
 pus Callofum, receives a fmall Branch from 
 the Cervical Artery. Having cut off its Ori- 
 gine, and feparated it from the Limb of the 
 Ventricle, you will obferve under it a fmall 
 Artery, beautifully diftributing its Branches 
 %p the Surface of the Ventricle, Raife now 
 
 the 
 
124 ^^^^ Method 
 
 the Fornix, and you will fee under it the 
 Septum Liicidum, which is only the inferior 
 Part of the Fornix -, then cut off the Cms 
 in its anterior Part, and turn it toward the 
 Occiput, that you may obferve the two pofte- 
 rior Crura creeping along the lateral Ventri- 
 cles. Under the Fornix you will find the 
 third Ventricle, rifing from the Union of the 
 two lateral ones, which has two Foramina, 
 one placed anteriorly near the Infundibulura 
 and pituitary Gland, called the Vulva ; the 
 other, in the posterior Part, and tending to- 
 ward the fourth Ventricle, termed the Anus, 
 having two Protuberances, one on each Side, 
 denominated the Tejies, and above it the Pi- 
 neal Gland, which Des Cartes fuppofed to be 
 the Seat of the Soul, and is eafily diftinguifh- 
 ed by its cineritious Colour. Some very im- 
 properly call it the Penis. In the fame Place 
 are two other Protuberances called Nates, 
 Having taken a View of all thefe Parts, you 
 are to pafs your Probe into the fourth Ven- 
 tricle, which defcends downward, and fol- 
 lowing the Trad of the Probe with the 
 Knife, cut into the Subftance of the Cere- 
 bellum till you come to the Ventricle. After 
 having obferved this Ventricle, return to its 
 
 anterior 
 
of dijj'e^iing Bodies. 125 
 
 toterior Part, and gently raife the Procefs of 
 the Cerebrum ; but firft feparate the Mammil- 
 lary Froce[jes from the Os Cribrojim, and 
 then lift up the Cerebrum^ to feparate the 
 Nerves in their Order rifing within the Cra- 
 nium. Firil, cut off the Optic Nerves^ be- 
 tween which and the following Pair you 
 will lind the Carotide Arteries palling dong 
 the Sides of the Skull, and diilributing them- 
 felves into an infinite Number of Branches 
 upon the Fia Mater : Thefe you are like- 
 wife to feparate, and, if poffible, the Pitu- 
 itary Gland along with them, which palles 
 through the Dura Mater under the Optic 
 Nerves : then the Nervi Motorii Ocuhrum 
 and a fmall Nerve which goes to the Tongue, 
 with another immediately after it, which 
 likewife goes to the Tongue, and climbs o- 
 ver the Os Fetrojitm \ next, the Nervi Aitdi- 
 foriiy with the Par Vagufn, which Nerve 
 being firft divided into a great many Fila- 
 ments, flides out of the Skull near the En- 
 trance of the internal Jugular -, and laftly, the 
 Ninth Pair, which make their Entrance out 
 of the Skull near the Ipinal Marrow. When 
 you are cutting thefe Nerves afunder, take 
 Care not to pull out the Brain with too great 
 
 Force, 
 
126 The M E T H O ]3 
 
 JForce, for then you will rend the Nerves^ 
 which are more tender near their Origine 
 than in their Progrefs. The next Thing you 
 are to mind, is to cut them oft clofs to the 
 Skull, and not break their Filaments 5 - for 
 there are fome Nerves, which are divided 
 into feveral Filaments before they go out of 
 the Skull, as has been obferved. After hav- 
 ing taken a View of, and differed all thefe 
 Particulars, you are now to return to the Oc- 
 ciput, and take out the Cerebellum ; to exe- 
 cute which, raife up the Cerebrum a little, and 
 then make three Incifions into its Membrane^ 
 which feparates it from the Cerebellum^ one 
 in a ftreight Line to the Occiput, and the o- 
 ther two obliquely to both Sides , but take 
 Care not to hurt the Bone, for fear of cut- 
 ting the Sinus's of the T)ura Mater. In this 
 Vault the Cerebellum is fo fituate, that 
 it cannot be viewed till taken out j therefore 
 put in at one Side of it a broad Iron Spatula 
 or Spoon, and fo take it out of the T)ura 
 Mater. You will obferve under it the Fro- 
 cefjm Vermiformis, fituate at the Root of the 
 Ipinal Marrow, between the two Lobes of 
 the Cerebellum, at whofe Sides are two, and 
 fometimes more Protuberances, which make 
 
 the 
 
h? 
 
 of dijJeSiing Bodies. 127 
 
 the Pons according to Va?"olius .hzHXy y having 
 pulled off the fpinal Marrow, take out the 
 Brain, which is the common Method of dif- 
 fering it. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Of the Varolian and Sylvian 
 
 Method of difeciing the Brain. 
 
 AS Conjiantius Varolius invented a new 
 Method of opening the Skull, fo has 
 he contrived another Way of dif- 
 fedling the Brain different from that of the 
 common 5 for, after diflecling the Skull, he 
 takes out the Brain whole, and, turning it up- 
 fide down, begins the DilTedion on that Side 
 where the Nerves take their Origine. I told 
 you before, that the Varolian Method of dif- 
 fed:ing the Skull, renders it unfit for framing 
 a Skeleton, and makes the Operation more 
 difficult, fince the Brain may be as well taken 
 out intire by a circular Sedtion round the Cra- 
 nium as otherwife, which has been already 
 (hewn in the fourth Chapter. Therefore, 
 
 to 
 
128 r& M E T H O D 
 
 to perform neatly -the Admlniftration, yoil 
 may put the Brain inverted into the Inlide of 
 the Os Verticis. 
 
 By this Method of dilTecftingj you will be 
 able to make more curious and accurate Ob- 
 fervations than in the preceding one. The 
 firft that comes under Confideration is the 
 FilTure of the Cerebrum, which divides it in- 
 to feveral Parts. To trace its Extremity, 
 you are, with the Point of the Knife^j to cut 
 afunder the minute Ramifications of the 
 Veins, which lie interfperfed there. The 
 next is the Pia Mater, ftretched here over 
 the Nerves like a Cobweb, and perforated in 
 feveral Places. When this Membrane is rent, 
 you will fee the Anafiomofis of the Carotide 
 and Cervical Arteries, by Means of an inter- 
 veening Branch, which mufl be cut oflf. 
 You here will obferve fome very minute Blood 
 Vefiels, or rather Fibres, here and there ex- 
 panded, which have their Origine from the Ca- 
 rotide and Cervical Arteries, whofe Contex- 
 ture is called the Rete Mirahile. The Cervi- 
 cal Artery, being contiguous to the fpinal 
 Marrow, and divided like the Greek Letter T, 
 is alfo here to be {q^vl. You may take a 
 View of the Pituitary Gland, but the great- 
 eft 
 
of dtjjecilng BODIES. 129 
 
 efl Part is generally left behind in the Sella 
 Turcica^ and the Infundibidum^ lituate behind 
 the Union of the Optic Nerves. Separate 
 thefe from the Optic Nerves, and find out 
 the Foramen leading to the. third Ventricle^ 
 then cut the Optic Nerves in the Middle, to 
 fee the Place of their Union and Communi- 
 cation, afterv^ard trace their Cavity, if they 
 have any. Ydu are next to fearch for the 
 Ventricles after the following Manner. Search 
 for that Branch of the Carotide Artery, 
 which, along with the Optic Nerve, enters 
 the Subflance of the Brain, and this will di- 
 rect you to the lateral Ventricle • for both 
 the Carotide Branch and Optic Nerve enter 
 this Ventricle, and the lafl: creeps along its 
 Sides, near the Corpus Callofum. But you 
 cannot yet have a full View of the whole 
 Ventricles, on account of the anterior Crura 
 of the fpinal Marrow, you mull: therefore 
 here flop a little, and take the fourth Ven- 
 tricle in your Way. Wherefore, raife gent- 
 ly the Medidla Oblongata^ feparate it with the 
 Point ofv the Knife frC^ th6 Cerebellum^ anA 
 here you will fee below ^ Proceffiis Verm'i- 
 ■formis^ with the Pofis Varoll 3 then you will 
 eafily come at the fourth Ventricle, whofe 
 K interior 
 
 M 
 
 ^*- 
 
ijo The Method 
 
 interior and poilerior Surface exadly reiem- 
 bles the Uterine Cavity. If the fpinal Mar- 
 row is a httle raifed, you will fee in this 
 Ventricle a Foramen leading to the thirds 
 and refembling a writing Pen, hence called 
 Calamus Scriptorim. Probe this Foramen 
 gently, and then cut afunder the fpinal Mar- 
 row in the Middle, where Nature herfelf 
 has chalked out the Way by an Interface, 
 which divides it into two Parts by a red Line. 
 Having made this DiviHon, you will foon ob- 
 ferve the third Ventricle, which is to be o- 
 pened with the Knife; and t)ien you will fee 
 its whole Cavity, the Septum Lticidum, For- 
 nix^ and the Avenue to the lateral Ventri- 
 cles. Having made your Obfervations here, 
 cut off \h&' Crura Medulla Spinalis that go to 
 the Brain, and lay them afide with the Ce- 
 rebeUiim -, which done, you will have a more 
 clear View of the Figure and Shape of the 
 lateral Ventricles, refembling, in fome Mea- 
 fure, a Horie-dioe, were it not for the Pro- 
 cefs in the Middle. 
 
 Having left the Cerebrum^ diffecfl the Cere-^ 
 bellum^ beginning on that Side where the 
 ■fourth Ventricle has fmall Sinufes ; -if it is 
 here divided exadly in the Middle, you will, 
 
 belides 
 
of diJJeBing Bodies. 131 
 
 befides thefe fmall Branches coming from the 
 Medulla Albicans^ obferve in that white Body 
 a different Colour, inclining to a yellow, and 
 reprefenting a folded Hand, with the little 
 Finger cut off. The Lamince of the Cere- 
 bellum^ after having removed the exterior 
 Coat arifing from the Pia Mater ^ may be 
 feparated from each other with the Back of 
 the Knife. 
 
 The Sylvian Method. 
 
 In this one Half of the Cerebrum is dif- 
 fectedj according to the common Methodg 
 and the other on the oppofite Side, accord- 
 ing to the inverfe Method, which indeed is 
 the moffc convenient and beft Way that has 
 yet been invented, becaufe it exac5tly demon- 
 ftrates thofe Parts which are but feen in the 
 inferior Side of the Cerebrum, and at the fame 
 Time you do not neglect obferving thofe 
 Parts fituate on its upper Part. The Manner 
 of performing this Operation is the fame with 
 that of the other two Methods jointly confi- 
 dered ; for any one of the Sides may be diflec- 
 ted after the common Method, and the other 
 being afterward taken out, and turned upfide 
 K 2 down. 
 
1-z The M E T H o B 
 
 down, dilTedted according to the invejled Me'^ 
 thod. As there is but only one Side here to 
 be diiTected, there mufl arife fome Difference 
 between it and the former -, but wherein this 
 Difference confifts, I lliall explain in a few 
 Words. In examining the Ventricles, the 
 only Difference is, that the Falx is not fepa- 
 rated from the Ventricles, nor from the Ce- 
 rebrufn^ except on one Side, but fo as to 
 keep its natural Situation. Having found and 
 opened the Ventricle , you proceed as before 
 till you come to the Fornix^ the Cms where- 
 of muft neither be cut off nor laid back, 
 but only raifed, to fee the third Ventricle, 
 and make your Obfervations as before. You 
 are not now to touch the fourth Ventricle, 
 but immediately endeavour to take out the 
 Cerebrum ; therefore, lay the remaining Half 
 of the Cerebrum on one Side, to fee the Ori- 
 gine and Progrefs of the Nerves i which be- 
 ing ieparated, take out the Cerebrum ^ and 
 proceed with the Operation after the inverfe 
 Method already mentioned ; for the Difference 
 is not fo great as to require any particular Di- 
 reiflions. 
 
 You have here three different Methods of 
 ■diifediing the Brain, now pradifed by the 
 
of differing BODIES. 155 
 moil eminent and accurate Anatomlfts ; out 
 of which you may choofe that you moft ap- 
 prove of: But, if I am to give my Opinion, 
 I would prefer the laft ; however this I will 
 leave to every one's Judgment, and now pro- 
 ceed to the Eye. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of the Method of dijJ'eBing the EyEc 
 
 ri "SHE Eye being one of the moft noble 
 I Organs of the Body, is therefore 
 placed within a bony Socket, and 
 and fortified by feveral Sorts of Fences a- 
 gainft any foreign Attack. It is externally 
 furrounded by the Eye-lids, whofe extreme 
 Circle, being fomewhat hard to the Touch, 
 is called the Tarfus^ in which are fixed a 
 Row of Hairs like fo many Pallifadoes, term- 
 ed Cilia, or the Eye-laflies. The Mufcuhis 
 Orbicularis aflifts in the Compofition of the 
 Eye-lids, of which already in the fecond 
 Chapter. When the Cilia are raifed, you 
 will fee the Tunica Albiiginea, denominated 
 K 3 like» 
 
154 Tke Met HOB 
 
 likewife Adnata, becaufe of its Adhefion ta 
 the Cornea, which appear full of Blood 
 Veffels, when there is too large a Quantity 
 of Blood lodged in the Head, either on the 
 Account of a Plethora, or a Stoppage. 
 The Eye being thus fixed in its bony Cavi- 
 ty, requires therefore a nice and a careful 
 Hand to take it out from thence. 
 
 This Operation muft either be performed 
 when the Skull is intire, or when dilTecled ; 
 the firfl: is the mof!: difficult, and yet more 
 often made ufe of 5 the laft is put in Prad:ice 
 when we want to trace the natural Situation 
 and Oi'igine of the Mufcles of the Eye, with 
 the Egrefs of the Optic Nerve -, to accom-= 
 plifli which, I will lay down the following 
 Direcftions. 
 
 Having removed the frontal Mufcles, 
 with thofe of the Falpebrcje^ and opened 
 the Skull, feparate the Eye-lid from the Eye- 
 brow, and the Periojieum from the up- 
 per Edge of the Orbit. But the DiiTedion 
 of the Brain ought to precede this, becaufe 
 its Procelles will hinder your Operation j 
 therefore cut it off at the Optic Nerves, then 
 faw off what remains of the Os Frontis^ 
 which muff be done twice^ by fixing your 
 
 Sav/ 
 
of dijJeSiing Bodies. 135 
 
 Sawfirft above the Canthus Major ^ and next 
 above the Canthus Minor j but vi^hile you are 
 iifing the Saw, deprefs the Eye, and pufli it 
 to either Angle, that it may not be cut, or 
 become a Hindrance to the Operation. Wlien 
 the thickeft Part of the Bone is fawed through, 
 you may divide the thinner offeous Lamina 
 above the Eye with a flrong Incifion Knife,, 
 and remove it ; thus you will fee the Eye 
 denudated, from which firfl feparate the Fe^ 
 riofteuniy then the Fat by Degrees, till quite 
 removed. You are here to take particular 
 Care of the Miifculus Trochleatis^ or Obliqum 
 Major, that moves the Eye obliquely j for it 
 pafles through the Cartilage which is fixed to. 
 the fuperior Part of the Canthus Major j this 
 Cartilage therefore muil not be cut off. 
 Having iQ^n the natural Situation of theMuf- 
 cles of the Eye, and their Origine about the 
 Optic Nerve, you may eafily take out the 
 Eye, by cutting afunder the Optic Nerves, 
 Motores OcuU, and the Falpehrce. 
 
 But the greateft Difficulty is to feparate the 
 Eye from the Canthus without hurting the 
 Bones j however, to fliorten your Work, 
 and carefully perform your Operation , 
 take the following Dire(5lions. When the 
 K 4 Eyc' 
 
136 The Method 
 
 Eye is feparated from the upper Bone, pull 
 it out gently downwards, then with a blunt 
 Knife fcrape off every where the Feriojieum 
 in fuch a Manner from the Orbit, that the 
 trochlea ^ fituate on the fuperior Part of the 
 inner Canthus, may, at the fame Time, be 
 removed ; which, if not done with Care, 
 will be eafily loft. In the greater Angle take 
 away the lachrymal Caruncle, v/ith the Eye- 
 lids, likewife the lachrymal Gland, compo- 
 sed of a great many fmall ones, and placed 
 under that Depreffion in the fuperior Part of 
 the Orbit, near the lefter Angle ; but this 
 cannot be done, if the Feriojieum is not re- 
 moved in the Manner above deferibed. When 
 the Eye is freed on all Sides in order to be ta- 
 ken out of the Orbit, put in a double Hook 
 in fuch a Manner into the Orbit, that both 
 Points may take hold of the Middle of the 
 Optic Nerve, which being ftretched, by pul- 
 ling the Hook toward you, may be eafily cut 
 through by a pointed Knife, like the Greek T • 
 but if you have not fuch a one, rnake ufe of 
 your diifeding Knife, and, with the Point 
 thereof, endeavour, after having pullied the 
 Eye towards the Nofe, to cut of? the Optic 
 KervCj with the farrovinding Mufcles ; but 
 
 if 
 
of dtjfeBtng Bodies. 137 
 
 if this will not do, turn the Eye back from 
 the Nofe, and cut the Optic Nerve on the 
 oppofite Side, till the Eye can be extracfted. 
 
 If you obferve the Eye after taken out, 
 and before the Feriojleum is removed, it will 
 reprefent the Figure of a Pear. We are to- 
 confider in the Eye, befides the Mufcles, 
 Glands and Fat, the Coats and Humours. 
 The firll: Coat is the Adnata^ which is feen 
 upon opening the Eye-lids, of which alrea- 
 dy. You may eafily feparate this Coat with 
 the Fat, then the lachrymal Gland, and keep 
 it for a Demonftration. You are now to enter 
 upon the Mufcles -, and iirfl, you are to fearch 
 for the Obliqtms Major, which may foon be 
 difcovered by handling the trochlea. Sepa- 
 rate this Mufcle before you enter upon any of 
 the reft, becaufe you will foon lofe it if you 
 do not. Clear next the Optic Nerve of the 
 Fat and Mufcles near the Globe of the 
 Eye, and make thereon a Ligature, that you 
 may fufpend it in fome convenient Place; 
 when this is done, free the firft Mufcle that 
 comes in your Way of the Fat, then the 
 fecond and third, and fo with the reft, till 
 they are finiftied. Thefe Mufcles, being fix 
 in Number^ ar? all inferted into the Tuni- 
 ca 
 
138 The Method 
 
 ca Sclerotica, and afterwards become carnous, 
 except the Obliqims Major, which is furnifhed 
 with a long Tendon, wherein you may take 
 notice of the Cartilaginous Trochea, which is 
 peculiar to that Mufcle. Having raifed the 
 Mufcles, remove the Fat along with the Ad- 
 nata, that the anterior Part of the Eye may 
 be intirely clear ; then cut off the Mufcles ; 
 from whofe Tendons, when expanded, a- 
 rife the Memhrana Innominata, which covers 
 the Fore-part of the Eye to the Cornea, and 
 is feparated with the Tendons of the Mufcles. 
 "When thefe two Coats, or rather Mem- 
 branes, are removed, proceed to the reft^ the 
 iirfl of which is white, and called, on ac- 
 count of its Hardnefs, Tunica Sclerotica. 
 This covers the whole Eye externally, but 
 degenerates in the Fore-part, and becomes 
 tranfparent, hence called Tunica Cornea, This 
 muft be removed before you can come to the 
 interior Parts, which may be done either by 
 making a circular or a crofs Incifion; If you 
 intend to preferve the Cornea whole, make 
 a circular Incifion, if not, a crofs one will 
 do. Take hold of the Cornea between two 
 Fingers of your Left-hand 3 one of which 
 place at the Cornea^ and the other at the Op- 
 tic 
 
of did'e^hig Bodies. 139 
 
 tic Nerve ; then cut the T^unica Sclerotica a- 
 crofs, if you defign to preferve the Cornea 
 whole ; if not, put your Fingers to the 
 Sides of the Eye, and gently comprefs it if 
 flaccid, and make a crofs Incifion in the Cor- 
 nea. Introduce next your ScifTars foftly, ei- 
 ther within the Sclerotica of the relaxed Eye 
 for fear of wounding the JJvea^ and cut it 
 through in a Line parallel with the Cornea ; 
 or introduce your SciiTars gently between the 
 Cornea and the cryftalline Humour, and con- 
 tinue your Sedion to the Optic Nerve 3 then 
 feparate the Sclerotica carefully from the Edge 
 of the TJ-vea^ where it furrounds the Pupil- 
 la^ fo as not to hurt the fubjacent Coats, 
 which would occalion an Efflux of the Hu- 
 mours. The remaining Part of this Coat is 
 eafily feparated from the Uvea, This Mem- 
 brane owes its Origine to the exterior Coat of 
 the Optic Nerve, which arifes from the Dz/- 
 ra Mater ^ as is plain from occular Demon- 
 ftration ; for if the Se(ftion be continued 
 through the Sclerotica and the external Coat 
 of the Optic Nerve, then this laft, being 
 contiguous to the Sclerotica^ may be leparat- 
 ed with it round the Globe of the Eye. 
 Having removed this Coat, the aqueous Hu^ 
 
 ^ mour. 
 
140 Tide Method 
 
 mour, fituate before the cryftalline, ought 
 firft to be demonftrated, becaufe, being of a 
 fluid Nature, without any folid Confiftence, is 
 immediately fpilt upon cutting open the Tii^ 
 nica Cornea^ or Sclerotica. 
 
 You now return to the reft of the Coats \ 
 the anterior Part of the firft that prefents it- 
 felf, is called the Uvea, and the pofterior, 
 the Choroeides. This you are to difledl 
 iongitudinalTy, and gently feparate the Edges 
 of your Incifion from the Retma, which is an 
 exceeding thin Membrane, therefore liable to 
 be hurt, if not minded. Make an Incifion in 
 the Ptipilla, becaufe it more iirmly adheres 
 there than in any other Part ; then feparate 
 it fo far, that the Humours, with their 
 Coats, may have a free Exit ; for the Pupil- 
 la being once removed, there is no Occafion 
 for a farther Separation. This Coat has alfo 
 its Origine from the interior Involucnim of the 
 Optic Nerve, which being diifedied, the Me- 
 dulla will foon appear -, therefore you need 
 not give yourfelf any farther Trouble, but 
 to fqueeze out this medullary Subftance, and 
 leave ,the Coat empty. 
 
 The third Coat is the Retina, which fome 
 imagine takes its Rife from the Medulla^ be-. 
 
 caufe 
 
of di\Jc^i?]g Bodies. 141 
 
 caufe it refembles it in Softnefs : It cannot be 
 eafily feparated from the TJvea^ therefore they 
 are generally both together feparated from the 
 I'linica Vitrea. The laft two Coats are the 
 tunica Vitrea and the Tunica Cryfiallina ^ 
 the laft of thefe furrounds and contains the 
 Cryftalline Humour, and the former the Vi- 
 treous, fo as not to be feparated j yet if you 
 touch either of them with the Point of the 
 Knife, they foon fhew themfelves, especially 
 the cryftalline, of which if you fcrape off 
 the leaft Quantity, it produces an Inequality 
 on the Surface of the Humours, 
 
 Yet thefe Humours muft be feparated from 
 each other, which requires a great deal of At- 
 tention. Separate therefore carefully the Pupilla 
 from the cryftalline Humour, then ^ut with 
 the Point of the Knife the Fibrillce between 
 the cryftalline and vitreous Coats, and fqueeze 
 out the vitreous Humour, by putting your 
 Fingers under the cryftalline. If you would 
 fee the natural Situation and Figure of all the 
 Humours, take the Eye out of the Orbit 'm. 
 a frofty Seafon, and, expofing it to the cold 
 Air, leave it till the Humours are frozen and 
 condenfed by the Cold ; afterward divide the 
 Eye with the Knife into two equal Farts, 
 
 and 
 
 
14^ The Method 
 
 and thus, among the reft, you will have a 
 full View of the aqueous Humour, which 
 otherwife runs off immediately upon the Dif- 
 ie(5tion of the Tunica Sclerotica, 
 
 CHAP. IX 
 
 Of the Method of dilj'e^ing theB^ARi 
 
 THE Ear^ or Organ of Hearing, is 
 commonly divided into external and 
 internaL By the external Ear is 
 meant all that which lies without the exter- 
 nal Orifice of the Meatus Auditoriiis in the 
 Oj Tempris'y and by the internal, all that 
 lies within the Cavities of the Bone, or bear 
 any Relation thereto. 
 
 In the external Ear we have only at pre- 
 fent the Mufcles to confider. When taking 
 off the Skin of the Head, I defired you to 
 have a particular Regard to thefe Mufcles, of 
 which there are two Pair, one for pulling 
 tlie Ears upwards, and the other for drawing 
 it downwards. The firft, called Levator or 
 Attolbis, is fituate above the Ear on the 
 
 Tempk 
 
of dijJeHhig Bodies. 143 
 
 Temple Bone, and being very thin, there- 
 fore eafily feparated along with the Skin. It 
 is about an Inch in Breadth, and of an ob- 
 long round Figure, narrower at the Ear than 
 any where elfe. The Way to feparate this 
 Mufcle is obvious. 
 
 The fecond Pair, termed Retrahens^ is 
 placed behind the Ear upon the Temple Bone, 
 and being of the fame Subftance and Magni- 
 tude with the former, is eafily feparated after 
 the Skin is taken off. If you incline to take 
 a View of the external Part of the Ear, you 
 may feparate the Skin which covers it, and 
 then cut off the Cartilage from the Bone. 
 
 In the internal Ear a great many Parts lie 
 hid, and cannot be feen till the Skull is bro- 
 ken, and the Oj Temporum, with the Os Pe~ 
 trofum^ feparated from the other Bones with 
 which they are connecfted. But while you 
 are feparating the Bones of the Cranium^ take 
 Care not to ufe too much Force, for fear of 
 hurting the internal Ear, fo as to break ei- 
 ther the Tympanmn^ or put the auditory 
 Bones out of their Places. When this is 
 done, and the Ear cleaned, take a View of 
 the Tympammi, and if fharp-lighted, you 
 may fee the Malleus through the tranfparent 
 
 Mem- 
 
144 ^^^^ Method 
 
 Membrane. Then with a Forceps break that 
 Part of the Bone placed toward the Os Fron^ 
 tis, to fee the Entrance of the Meatus Audi- 
 torius into the Os Fetrofiim^ and take away 
 one Half of it to g;et a full View of the Si- 
 tuation of the fmall Bones in the Concha; 
 but take Care not to hurt the Os Petrofum, 
 becaufe the Labyrinth and Cochlea lie con- 
 cealed in it. You will here meet with the 
 Mufcles of the internal Ears^ which ferve to 
 move the Malleus. 
 
 Having removed the fmall Bones, apply 
 the Saw to the Os Petrofwn^ for it is too hard 
 to be managed with the Knife, I could ra- 
 ther wdfh to fhew the Method of perform- 
 ing this Operation by ocular Demonftratioii 
 than Words, becaufe it is very difficult ; how- 
 ever, I will endeavour to explain it as well as 
 I can. 
 
 I divide the Os Fetrofiim into three Sides ; 
 in the iirfl is that Foramen through which the 
 Optic Nerve paiTes j the fecond, next to this, 
 is that which is ittn in the internal Part of 
 the Skull when whole j and the third is di- 
 rectly oppofite to the iirfl toward the Con- 
 cha^ and in it may be i^tn the Fenejira Ova- 
 Us. Yo.u are now to cut through the oiie- 
 
 ous 
 
of diU'eStirig BODIES. 145 
 Qus Lamina with a fine Saw, which covers 
 the third Side- and then you will firft ob- 
 ferve the DuBus Cochleatiu^ oppofite to the 
 Foramen^ forrhed for the PafTage of the au- 
 ditory Nerve j but it does not lie diredtly op- 
 pofite to it ; for the Cochlea is nearer the Os 
 Temporis. If a little more of the Cochlea is 
 fawed off, you will alfo fee the tw» PafTagcs 
 of the Labyrinth, rrieeting above the Cochlea 
 above the fame Foramen, If you have not 
 fawed through the whole Canal of the Goch- 
 ieay you may make a further Opening with a 
 File J becaufe it is ndt equally prominent in 
 all Places. Having iritirely laid open the 
 Cochlea^ you will meet at its Extremity, 
 with a larger Cavity, where you will fee the- 
 Contortions of the Labyrinth meet, and the 
 Feneflra Ovalis, 
 
 You are now to trace the ferpentine Ca- 
 nals of the Labyrinth, which ai^e three in 
 Number, and all meet in on6 Place. When 
 you diffedl this, you ought to have before you 
 fuch another Bone already diffedted, in order 
 to regulate; your Operation accordingly ; but 
 for want of fuch a one, I will endeavour to 
 point out, in as plain a Manner as I can, the 
 Place where you are to make your Begin- 
 L ni'ngy 
 
1^6 The Method 
 
 ning. In the fecond Side you will fee a fmall 
 Protuberance, near the Os Temporh j under 
 this lies one of the Canals, which is a Kind 
 of a Bafe to the Triangle ^ for fuch is the 
 Polition of thefe Canals, that on that Side 
 where they face the Os Temporis, they make 
 an equilateral Triangle ; but thefe three Ca- 
 nals, taken together, refemble a Triangle, 
 whofe Vertex is at the Cochlea^ and Bafe near 
 the Os Tentporis, You may know the Situ- 
 ation of the reft by this Figure j therefore, to 
 feparate them, remove that which is between 
 the abovementioned Canal and Os Temporis. 
 The exterior hard Lamina mufl be broken 
 with a Hammer, and the remaining ipun- 
 geous Subftance may be cut off with a Knife. 
 Between thefe Canals alfo, which are inclof- 
 ed in a hard and iblid Bone, lies a fpungy 
 Subftance, which fills the empty Spaces ; 
 this muft be removed with the Knife, that 
 each of thefe Canals may be feen. Thefe Ca- 
 nals mufl likewife be laid open, this may be 
 done, by fcraping the Bone, if green and foft, 
 with a Knife, but if dry, you muft ufe a File. 
 You may enlarge a little the Fora??iina which 
 appear in the filed Bone, and may protrad: 
 them on both Sides till they meet 3 if you do 
 
 not 
 
of dijje^iing Bodies. 147 
 
 not approve of this Method, convey a Hog's 
 Briftle through each Canal, fo as that it may 
 find its Exit at the Fenejira Ovalis. 
 
 This Operation requires not fo great an 
 Apparatus in the Head of a Fcetus^ becaufe 
 the Bones being foft and tender, may be dif- 
 fed:ed with the Knife, without the Help of 
 a Saw, 
 
 L 2 BOOM 
 
148 The Method 
 
 BOOK IV. 
 
 Of the Extremities. 
 
 The I N T R O D U C T I O N. 
 
 'HILE I am prefixing this Title, I 
 think proper to inform my Read- 
 er, that I not only intend to explain 
 the Mufcles belonging to the Extremities^ 
 But almofl all thofe of the human Body that 
 have not been mentioned in the Diitedion of 
 the Cavities 3 viz. The Mufcles of theLoyns, 
 Back, Neck, and Head ; therefore this Book 
 may be denominated Myotomice & Myogra- 
 phice specimen. As the Mufcles are the Sub^ 
 jed of this Book, I think it will not be ta- 
 ken- 
 
of diU'eEihig BODIES. 149 
 
 ken amifs, if I fhould here introduce two or 
 three Sentences taken from Riolan and Galen 
 concerning them. 
 
 Riolan fays, That he who is well acquainted 
 with Myography^ will eajily iinderjland Myoto- 
 my^ and be able ofhi?}jfelf to manage this Fart 
 of Anatomy^ which fome think the moft diffi- 
 cult, if he obferve the Method I am going to 
 prefcribe. 
 
 It is certain the Adminiftration of the Muf- 
 cles is not a difficult Operation, if the Admi- 
 nistrator will trace and obferve the Order in 
 which they follow one another in the Body, 
 If therefore you will keep in the Path I fhall 
 now chalk out, and confult Eujlachius's^ 
 CouperSj &c. Tables, you need not fear com- 
 ing fafely to your Journey's End. I muil 
 likewife delire you to cut off, and throw a- 
 lide all the Mufcles, when feparated, except 
 you intend to referve them for a Demonftra- 
 tion ; becaufe, if left hanging at the Body, 
 they will be troublefome, and obflrudl the 
 Work. 
 
 Becaufe the Adminiftration of the Mufcles 
 
 was alfo chiefly inftituted to know the 
 
 proper Adion of every Mufcle, I fhall 
 
 here, in general, fhew you from Galeriy in 
 
 L 3 what 
 
I50 The Method 
 
 what Manner you are to come at this Know- 
 ledge. 
 
 Mmd, fays he, how this is to he done ; for 
 the following Difcourfe is intended to treat of 
 the Method of dijjeBing a dead Creature^ that 
 yoti may thereby underjiand the Motion of eve- 
 ry particular Fart of it when alive. Cut off 
 therefore all the Fie fi from thofe Bones you in- 
 tend to examine^ leaving untouched only thofe 
 Mufcles which are the Injiruments of their Mo- 
 tions, But when you have raifedthefe Mufcles 
 to their Extremities ^ they alfo muft be fepa- 
 rated from the Bones ^ from which they take 
 their Origine^ keeping them extended in the 
 fame Foftion as they %vere before. If this Ope- 
 ration is performed as it ought to be^ you will 
 plainly perceive the Motio?is of the Bones which 
 have Juch Mufcles inferted in them. 
 
 He brings the Digaftrick Mufcle of the 
 lower Jaw as Proof of confirming what he 
 has advanced, faying, If you cut off its Ori- 
 gine^ and diffeB its whole Body to the Vhin, 
 without touchi?ig that Fart inferted into the low-- 
 er faw^ and if you afterward pull this Muf- 
 cle toward the Flace of its Origine^ that Fart 
 inferted in the lower Jaw will follow, and the 
 Mouth will be opened. T^hefe Operations muft 
 
 be 
 
of diffeElhig Bodies. 151 
 
 be performed after the Skin is intirely removed, 
 and but for a Jhort Time after the Death of 
 the SubjeB, while the Ligaments of the Arti- 
 culations and Mufcles continue foft and flexible. 
 The Functions of every Mufcle may likewife be 
 exat?iined, when all the other Mufcles an re- 
 moved, except that under Confideration and 
 that which aSis in Oppofition to it. 
 
 What has been faid concerning the Me- 
 thod of finding out the proper Adion of 
 every Mufcle will be fufficient. I will now 
 return to the Confideration of the Extremi- 
 ties, which are of two Kinds. But though 
 they are of two Sorts, as the Hands and 
 Feet, yet the infinitely wife Creator and Ar= 
 chitedl, has alfo made a Pair of each ; there- 
 fore, to avoid Repetition, I will only confider 
 the Extremities of one Side, becaufe the 
 Operation is almoft the fame on either Side. 
 
 L 4 CHAP. 
 
152 The Me T H o i^ 
 
 CHAR I. 
 
 Of the Method of ralfng the Skin 
 and Fat from the Hand and Foot. 
 
 I Begin with the Hand; becaufe more ufe- 
 ful than the Foot j but it mufl be firft 
 cleared of its Skin, t3efore you can dif- 
 fed the Mufcles. 
 
 I told you in the fecond Book, that an In- 
 cifion mufl be niade in the Skin to the Mid- 
 dle of the Humerus^ before you could fee 
 the Infertion of the pedtoral Mufcles. Be- 
 gin your Incifion at the End of this Sedlion, 
 and continue it along the Middle of the Arm 
 above the Flexure, where the Median Vein 
 creeps under the Skin, which take Care not 
 to cut ; then carry on your Incifion along the 
 Outfide to the Extremity of the Thumb i 
 Afterward feparate the Skin of the Arm from 
 the Fat as far as the Hand, according to the 
 Directions already given. At the Top of the 
 Cubitus or Olecranon^ there is a Membrane fb 
 cloiely united with the Skin^ as to render it 
 
 vtry 
 
of diJfeSiing Bodies. 153 
 
 very difficult to be feparated in that Place, 
 Becaufe there are a great Number of Veins 
 creeping under the Skin, you mull: take par- 
 ticular Care that they be not wounded while 
 railing the Skin, which would prevent your 
 feeing the beautiful Diftributions and Diva- 
 rications of the fubcutaneous Branches. 
 
 And becaufe there is a greater Variety in 
 dilTecfling the Hand than the Arm, I will 
 therefore treat of it more particularly in a few 
 Words . Having made an Incilion in the ex- 
 ternal Side of the Thumb according to the 
 Direcflions given, make one in the internal 
 Side parallel to it; and, in the fame Manner, 
 make a double Incifion in each Finger, ex- 
 cept the litde one, the inner Side of which 
 you need only open lengthwife. Having 
 made thefe Incifions in the Skin, lirft fepa- 
 rate it from the Infide of the Fingers, then 
 from the Palm of the Hand^ where you are 
 to obferve, that the nervous Expanfion of 
 tlie Palmaris Longiis is interwoven with the 
 Fat, and adheres fo clofe to the Skin of the 
 Palm of the Hand, as fcarce to be feparat- 
 ed, unlefs it be by a dextrous and experien- 
 ced Hand -, by beginning the Separation at 
 the Roots of the Fingers, and proceeding to- 
 wards 
 
154 "^^-^^ Method 
 
 wards the Flexure of the Carpus^ always tak- 
 ing Care not to cut the Tendon of the Muf- 
 cle, which was often done in Galen's Time. 
 However, Galen never feparated the Skin 
 of the. Hand, but took it off intire ; and it 
 was owing to this that he found out the Ten- 
 don, which had been before negledted. In dif- 
 fed:ing the Fingers, take Care not to cut the 
 Blood VelTels and Nerves, which only run along 
 their Sides. Having taken off the Skin on the 
 Infide, turn the Hand, and take the Skin alfo 
 off the Outfide. Having made an Inciiion round 
 the Roots of the Nails, feparate them from 
 the Bones, by putting the Knife under them | 
 then take them off along with the Skin, and, 
 being divided into fmall leathern Thongs, 
 they will difcover their genuine Origine. 
 
 So much for the Skin, under which the 
 Veins run along, being fometimes fo over- 
 run with Fat, that they are fcarce vifible, 
 unlefs cleared of it. To perform this Opera- 
 tion, begin near the axillary Veins, and free 
 them there of the Fat -, from thence pro- 
 ceed towards the Extremities, but take Care 
 not to cat the Branches arifing from the lar- 
 ger VeiTels. Perhaps you will fay, I ought 
 to fh^w you how to avoid them j but that is 
 
 not 
 
of dtjjeBtng Bodies. 155 
 
 not fo eafily done as fome imagine, be- 
 caufe thefe Branches take a different Courfe 
 in different Subjeds ; therefore it mufl be 
 your Bufinefs to perform every Part with the 
 greatefl Exadnefs and Attention. But to 
 proceed, the Veins mufl be cleared of their 
 Fat after the following Manner. Whenever 
 you obferve a Tra6lof a Vein, make a lon- 
 gitudinal Incifion into the Fat, lift up the 
 Vein with a Hook, feparate the extended 
 Fibres under it with the Point of the Knife, 
 till the Vein is cleared, and then remove 
 the Pat J or make an Incifion in the Fat, 
 where it is free from the Vein, and then fe- 
 parate it from the Mufcles. But where you 
 meet with Veins, make a longitudinal Inci- 
 fion in the inner Membrane of the Fat j and 
 for the refl, proceed as has been direded. 
 The Cephalic and Hepatic Veins march along 
 the external Parts ; but as you met with fome 
 Difficulty in raifing the Skin of the Hand 
 fo you will find the fame in removing the 
 Fat there ; becaufe the Tendo Falmaris is fo 
 deeply interwoven with the Fat in the Palm 
 of the Hand, that one cannot be removed 
 without the other. On the Back of the 
 Hand there is only a vifcid glutinous Sub- 
 fiance^ 
 
156 The Method 
 
 fiance, which does not deferve the Name 
 of Fat, yet this rather increafes than dimi- 
 niflies the Difficulty of the Operation. The 
 Veins, being here likewife flaccid and emp- 
 ty, on account of the Return of the Blood 
 to the Heart, are not eafily feparated from 
 the Membranes; wherefore this Operation 
 rnuft require a great Deal of Labour, Affi- 
 duity, and Patience : For the reft, proceed as 
 above. 
 
 The Skin of the Arm being taken off, 
 turn the Body on its Face, and then fkin the 
 Back till you fee the Apices of the Vertebrm 
 of the Back, likewife the Extremity of the 
 Os Hium and the Gluteus Maximus, or which 
 is the fame, till you have denudated Half the 
 Back : The Fat muft likewife be fo ht re- 
 moved. 
 
 CHAR 
 
of dipBifig Bodies. 157 
 
 CHAP. 11. 
 
 Of the Muscles of the Scapula^ 
 
 THE Scapula, or Homoplata^ is that 
 broad Bone which lies upon the 
 Back, ferves for the Articulation of 
 the Humerus^ and is moved different Ways 
 by five Pair of Mufcles, viz. 
 
 1. Serratus Minor 3. Rhomboides, 
 
 Anticus. 4. Levator Scapulee, 
 
 2. Trapezius. 5, Serratus Major, 
 
 I. Serratus Minor Anticus, lies im- 
 mediately under the PeSloralis^ afld afcends 
 obliquely to the Scapula, as appears by the 
 Direcllion of its Fibres. Raife its inferior 
 Side, then feparate from the Breaft %«r« la^siv, 
 or with the fubjacent Membrane, after hav- 
 ing cut off its Origine from the Ribs. It 
 adheres in its Progrefs to the Deltoides, un- 
 der which it marches to the Caracoide Pro- 
 cefs of the Scapida^ where it is inferted, from 
 which feparate it. 
 
 While the Body lies fupinely on the Table, 
 you fhouid feparate the Serratus anterior and 
 Major from the Scapula and Mufculus Suhfca- 
 
 pularis. 
 
158 7X'^ Me T H o B 
 
 pidaris^ then turn the Body, becaufe the other 
 Mufcles of the Scapula lie on the Back. 
 
 2. Trapezius, alfo called Ciiciillaris or 
 Scapularis^ becaufe it covers the other Muf- 
 cles of the Neck and Back, and is the firft 
 that appears after the Body is laid on its FacCj 
 and the Skin and Fat are removed. It arifes 
 from the occipital Bone, from the Spines of 
 the cervical and dorfal Vertebra, and the 
 flefhy Fibres run in different Directions, and 
 terminate by one continued infertion into the 
 Spine of the Scapula. To raife this Mufcle, 
 begin at the inferior Part oppolite to the 
 Loins, v\^here the Fibres afcend obliquely to^ 
 ward the Scapula -, cut off thefe Fibres, af- 
 ter pufhing back the Scapula to the Back, 
 and, putting your Finger under the Mufcle^ 
 feparate it till you come to the Aponeurojis^ 
 •which unites it with the Spines : This Apo- 
 neurojis mufl be feparated from the SacrO" 
 Lumbaris and the Longijpmus Dorji, and cut 
 off from the Spines, afcending gradually to 
 the Head ; when you are above the Mufcles 
 of the Neck, return to the Scapula, and 
 feparate the Trapezius from its fpinal Procefs, 
 that it may not hereafter be in your Way» 
 
 3. Rhomboid Es, called alfo ^adratus 
 from its Figure^ lies under the Trapezius ; 
 
 arifes 
 
of differing Bo DIES. 159 
 
 arifes from the fuperior Vertebrce of the 
 Back, and inferior of the Neck, and reach- 
 ing obliquely down to the Bafis of the ^ca^ 
 pula^ is there inferted. You are, according to 
 the Diredlons given with refpedt to the for- 
 mer Mufcle, to feparate this, by the Help 
 of your Hand, from the fubjacent Parts, be- 
 ginning at the Side : But, becaufe it clofely 
 adheres in its Courfe to the Tendon of the 
 Serrattis Pojiims Superior, you are there to 
 ufe the Knife, and cut it off at its Origine 
 and Infertion, 
 
 4. Levator, called alfo Mufciilus Pati^ 
 entice J becaufe it is generally ufed in pulling 
 up the Shoulder, when we exprefs any Sign 
 of Paffion. The Origine of this Mufcle lies 
 hid among the Mufcles of the Neck ; there- 
 fore feparate the Majioidceus and Scalenus 
 from the anterior Side, in order to find it, 
 which is in the tranfverfe FrocefTes of the 
 fuperior Vertebrae of the Neck 3 cut it 
 off from thence, and trace its Infertion, 
 which is in the fuperior Angle of the Sca-^ 
 pula. 
 
 5. Serratus Major, arifes internally 
 from the whole Bafis of die Scapula^ and is in- 
 ferted bv Dentiform, or Tooth-like Procefies, 
 
 by 
 
i6o The Method» 
 
 by an equal Number of them, from whence 
 jt has taken its Name, into all the true Ribs, 
 and fome of the falfe. Separate this Mufcle 
 anteriorly from the Subfcapukris, of which 
 hereafter -, pofteriorly from the Ribs, which 
 may be wholly done xutu. dapaiVj or by raifing 
 only the fubjacent Membrane, except its O^ 
 rigine and Infertion^ which muft be cut off 
 with a Knife. 
 
 G H A P. III. 
 
 Of the Muscles ofihe Humerus, 
 
 T 
 
 HE Mufcles deilined to move the 
 Humerus, are generally reckoned 
 nine. viZe 
 
 1. Pe£ioraUs Major ^ 6. Rotundus Minor: 
 
 2. Dekoides, 7. InfrafptnoMs. 
 
 3. Perforatus. 8. Suprafpinatus, 
 
 4. Laiijjimus Dorfi. g. BiSfcapiddrU: 
 
 5. Rotundus Major o 
 
 I. PeCtoti A LIS Major lies upon, and 
 covers the greateft Part of the Breaft. The 
 
 Method 
 
oj di piling Bodies. i6i 
 
 Method of railing this Mufcle I have alrea- 
 dy iliewn In Book 11. Chap. II. If you re- 
 move the PeBoralis. and Serrafus Minor, you 
 will fee three Kinds of VelTels coming out 
 of the Thorax through the Miifcuhis Scalenus, 
 From the fuperior Nerve, (for here five thick 
 Nerves unite) arifes a Branch, which refled:- 
 ing backward, is diftributed among the 
 Mufcles of the Scapula. From the fame 
 Place arife the Cephalic and Hepatic Veins 5 
 the firft of which, paffing between the Del- 
 ioides and Pe5f oralis, makes its Appearance 
 at the Extremities of thefe Mufcles, and. 
 Continuing its Courfe under the Skin along 
 the external Side of the Biceps^ where it is 
 accompanied by a Nerve, goes deeper at the 
 Flexure of the Cubitus, The Hepatic Veint 
 paffes along the Infide of the Arm, and after 
 forming the Median Vein, defcends to the 
 Head. I nov/ return to the Mufcles. 
 
 2o Deltoides is a large broad Mufcle/ 
 which lies upon the fuperior Part of the 
 Arm, and may be felt in living People. It 
 arifes from the Spine of the Scapula, the A- 
 cromion and Clavicula^- and is inferted in a 
 rough Protuberance near the Middle of tlie 
 iiwnerus^ almoft at the fame Place with the 
 M Pe^oralis 
 
i6z The Method 
 
 TeBoralis Major. Separate iirfl the Cephalic 
 Vein ', then, raifing the Humerus^ difled: the 
 DeltoideSj firft in the Side next the Back, be- 
 caufe it adheres but loofely in that Place, 
 therefore more eafily feparated. It afcends 
 above the Jnfrafpi?iatus to the Spine of the 
 Scapula, to which you are to keep in making 
 your Incifion, carrying it obliquely upwards^ 
 and when you come to the Spine, there cut 
 it oiFj then feparate it from the Acromion 
 and Clavicula, and turning it toward the Hu- 
 meruSj feparate it, at its Infertion, from that 
 Bone, which is there very firm, 
 
 3. Perforatus is a flender Mufcle per- 
 forated in the Middle, for letting a large 
 Branch of the fourth Pair of Nerves of the 
 Neck to pafs through it for forming the firft 
 brachial Pair; hence it has its Name from 
 VeJlinghiS, but Riolan calls it Coracoidcsus, and 
 Coraco-brackiaUs, from its Origine and Infer- 
 tion. It adheres to the Scapula, with one 
 of the Heads of the Biceps, with which it 
 is clofely joined and intermixed. Begin and 
 feparate this Mufcle near its Infertion from the 
 Biceps, You will here obferve that Nerve, 
 which being feparated from that Conjuga- 
 tion of Nerves that go to the Arm, perfo- 
 rates 
 
of diJJeSiing BODIES. i6 j 
 
 rates the Infide of this Mufcle, and conti- 
 nues its Courfe under the Biceps to the Cubi- 
 tus and Extremity of the Hand. 
 
 On the Infide of this Mulcle lies a large 
 Nerve with Veins and Arteries 5 about the 
 Middle of the Perforatus one of the Branch- 
 es leaving its Trunk, and, under the Exten^ 
 for Biceps Ctibiti^ accompanying the Brachi^ 
 aus Internus^ is diflributed among the Muf- 
 cles, fituate at the pofterior Part of the Cubi^ 
 tus^ yet foj that a Part thereof marches along 
 the Supinator Longus to the Hand, climbs 
 bver the Radius^ and diflributes its Branches 
 upori the external Side of the Index and Mid- 
 dle-finger. Near the End of this Mufcle the 
 Nerve is divided into two Parts j one is car- 
 ried back towards the Cubitus^ from thence 
 to the Extremity of the Little-finger j hence 
 the Gaufe of Pain or Numenefs in the Lit- 
 tle-finger when the Olecranon is hurt ; the 
 other portion proceeding forward between the 
 Profundus and Sublimis to the Hand, enters it 
 under the Thumbs and from thence goes to 
 the Extremities of the Fore and Middle-fin- 
 gers. 
 
 You are now* to turn the Body, becaule 
 M 2 all 
 
164 r& M E T H O D 
 
 all the abovementioned Mufcles are fituate 
 in its anterior Part, 
 
 4. Latissimus Dorsi, called 2\{o y^ni- 
 fcalptor, arifes by a broad Aponeurofis from the 
 Spines of the Lumbus Vertebra, and from the 
 Spine of the Os Ilium. 
 
 In raifing the abdominal Mufcles, I advif- 
 ed you to feparate a Part of this Mufcle j 
 therefore begin your Se(5lion here, carry it 
 upward, and feparate the Mufcle with your 
 Fingers, or the Handle of the Knife, which 
 will eafily and quickly break the Fibres ; then 
 defcending towards its Origine, cut off from 
 the Spine the Os Ilium , and carefully fepa- 
 rate it from the Serratus Pojiiais Inferior, 
 becaufe here their tendinous Origines are not 
 only clofely united, but fo intermixed with 
 each other, that it will require a careful 
 Hand to remove this Mufcle, and keep the 
 Serratus on the Body. In feparating this 
 Mufcle, you will meet with a fmall Bundle 
 cf fleihy Fibres, ariiing from the externa! 
 Side of the Bafe of the Scapula, near its an- 
 terior Angle, and adhering to the fuperior 
 Part of this Mufcle in its Progrefs along the 
 Cofia inferior, to be loil in the fame, where 
 it began to grow tendinous. If thefe fiefliy 
 
 Fibres- 
 
of diJJeSiing Bodies. 165 
 
 Fibres are not to be reckoned a diftindt Mul- 
 cle, which none has yet done, they muft then 
 of courfe be taken for a Part of this Mufcle, 
 becaufe they unite, and are inferted with it. 
 Which of thefe foever be the Cafe, you are 
 to raife them from the Scapula ^ and feparate 
 them with the Latiffimiis Dorfi. 
 
 If the Clavicle is feparated, you may take 
 off the Arm from the Body, in order to 
 manage it better hereafter according to Plea- 
 fure, 
 
 5. RoTUNDUs Major, called alfo Teres 
 Major J lies contiguous to the abovemention- 
 ed carnous Mafs, and takes its Origine from 
 the inferior Angle of the Scapula. Near to 
 this is the 
 
 6. RoTUNDUs Minor, or the Tranfver- 
 falis Brevis, which arifes from the inferior 
 
 Co/ia of the Scapula^ but fomewhat nearer 
 to the Arm. Separate thefe two Mufcles, by 
 beginning at their Infertions where they are 
 djftindt 3 for the firfl has its Infertion near the 
 Middle of the Humerus^ and the other in its 
 Head. Having feparated them, cut off the 
 Jiotundus Major from the Cojla Scapulc:e^ and 
 the Minor from the hifrajpinatus, and like- 
 •vyife at its Origine. 
 
 M 3 • 7, In- 
 
i66 The Method 
 
 7. Infraspinatus, called alfo Super- 
 fcapuhris Inferior and Seciindus, lies hid in 
 that Cavity of the Scapula, formed by the 
 Spine and the Dorfum Scapula in its inferior 
 Part, and is inferted in the rou^ Protube- 
 rance on the Head at the Humerus. The 
 whole Operation of this Mufcle is performed 
 by beginning with raifing it from the Bone, 
 and ending with cutting it off at its Infertion. 
 
 8 : Su PR ASP I N A T us, termed alfo Super- 
 fcapuhris Superior and Primus, is lituate in 
 the fuperior Cavity of the Scapula, oppofite 
 to the former, or in the Interfcapulum Supe- 
 rius^ and proceeds under the Acromion to the 
 Head of the Humerus, Firft, cut off the 
 Ligaments between the ^wo ProcelTes of the 
 Scapula, and then raife the Mufcle from the 
 Bone, beginning at the Spine of the Scapula, 
 
 9. Subscapular is, denominated alfo In-- 
 frafcapularis and Immerfus, poflefTes the inner 
 or concave Side of the Scapula, arifes from 
 its Bafe, and is inferted in the Protuberan9e 
 on the Head of the Humerus. Raife it firfl 
 fiom the Cojla Scapulee^ and then from its 
 Cavity, 
 
 CHAP, 
 
of diffeSiing BODIES. 167 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of the Muscles that move the 
 Cubitus. 
 
 THE Cubitus has five Mufcles for per- 
 forming its double Motion, 'viz. 
 Flexion and Extenfion, two Flexors 
 iituate on the Fore-fide of the Arm, and 
 three Extenfors on the Back- fide. As to the 
 Flexors, it miift be obferved, that their Con- 
 ne(5lion with the Cubitus can fcarce be feen, 
 till fome Mufcles belonging to the Hand are 
 removed, of which more in the next Chap- 
 ter ; therefore you mufl not be too quick in 
 cutting off thefe Mufcles , but leave the Dif- 
 fedtion of their Origine till you are done with 
 the Mufcles of the Hand. 
 
 The Difpofition and Names of thefe Muf- 
 cles are as follow, vi^^ 
 
 1. Biceps. 3. Extenfor Longus. 
 
 2. Brachiceus Liter- 4. Extetifor Brevis. 
 
 nus, 5. Anconeus. 
 
 M 4 I. Bi- 
 
i68 The Method 
 
 1. Biceps is the firft of the Flexors, and 
 fo called from its double Originei one where- 
 of arifes from the Proceffus Coracoides, and 
 the other from the inferior Part of the Cer- 
 ^ix Scapula. It defcends freight down, and 
 is inferted in the Tubercle of the Radius by 
 a ftrong thick Tendon ; hence the Reafon 
 that we feel a StiiFnefs near the Flexure, by 
 flrongly drawing back the Cubitus on a fud- 
 4en. The Median Vein pafles along this 
 Mufcle, therefore you mufl: take Care not to 
 prick the fubjacent Tendon when the Vein is 
 opened. The Separation of this Mufcle is 
 eafiiy performed, if you take hold of its two 
 Heads in your Hand, and pull them dov/n, 
 then feparate it K«T«5«pc-iv, or with the fubja- 
 cent Membrane. You may pull afunder its 
 fleihy Bellies, or feparate them with the 
 'Knife ; for each of them, near its Origine, 
 is wrapt tip in a particular Membrane. 
 
 2. Brachi^us Intjirnus is tbefecond 
 of the Flexors, which arifes from about the 
 Middle of the Humerus^ from whence it de- 
 fcends under the former Mufcle upon the 
 Humerus^ hence its Name 5 and is inferted 
 into the fuperior and anterior Ecphyfls of the 
 yina. It is hid among the Mufcles of the 
 
 "Radius, 
 
of cVtQeBing Bodies. 169 
 
 Radins^ and adheres chiefly to the Supinator 
 Longus, which mufl be firft raifed before you 
 can go about the Difledion of this Mufcle, 
 which may there be feparatcd from the Hu- 
 merus^ and afterward pulled down. The 
 Veins and Arteries which go to the Infide of 
 the Hand, and efpecially the Carpus^ pafs 
 over this Mufcle in their Way. Having done 
 with the Flexors, we now come to the Exr 
 tenfors. 
 
 3. Extensor Lqngus, v/hich may alfo 
 be called Biceps Pofticus, becaufe it has a dou- 
 ble Origine ;, one of which ariles from the 
 inferior Cojia ScapulcE^ near its Cervix, and 
 the other frorn the Humerus ; both which 
 unite, and are inferted into the fuperior and 
 external Procefs of the Ulna, termed Ancon, 
 or Olecranon *. To this Mufcle is joined a 
 Nerve that defcends to the Cdrpus, of which 
 already in the firft Chapter, under the Per- 
 foratus. This Mufcle is eafily feparated at 
 its Origine 5 but it is a very difficult Opera- 
 tion at its Infertion, where it clofely adheres 
 to, and, in foqie Meafure, intermixed with 
 
 * Rtolan makes two Mufcles of this, and calls that the 
 Exterior Longus whicli arifes from the CoJia Scapulas, and thp 
 other the Bre-vis, which takes its Origine fiom the Neck of 
 |he Humerus. 
 
 the 
 
170 The Method 
 
 the Extenfor Brevis ; for it muft be here 
 carefully obferved, that the Endings of Ex- 
 tenfor Longus and Brevis unite as it were into 
 one, before they are inferted into the Olecra- 
 non^ jufl: as thofe which are fubfervient to 
 the Extenfion of the Tibia ; the Vajii, Cm- 
 7'eus^ and ReBus^ being clofely intermixed 
 with one another, make but one Tendon, 
 which, furrounding the Patella^ is inferted 
 into the anterior Part of the Tibia. 
 
 4. Extensor Brevis, called by Riolan 
 Brachiatis Externus, arifes pofteriorly from 
 about the Neck of the Humerus, to which it 
 adheres m its Defcent to the external Con- 
 dyle of that Bone. It muft, in fome Mea- 
 fure, be diftinguifhed from the former Muf- 
 cles, and fcraped off from the Humerus, 
 
 5. ANCONiEus, being a very fmall Muf- 
 cle, about the Bignefs of one's Thumb, is 
 fituate on the external Side, on the Olecranon 
 above the Articulation. It may be ittn 
 through the nervous Coat in which it is wrapt, 
 and is diftinguifhed from the reft of the Muf- 
 cles by a white Line. Make an Incifion in 
 the Membrane above the white Line, which 
 goes obliquely to the Cubitus, then feparate 
 this Mufcle from the adjacent ones, froni the 
 
 ipferior 
 
of dljfeSiing BODIES. iji 
 inferior Ecphyfis of the Humerus^ alfo from 
 the Olecranon and Cubitus, 
 
 I would have added the Mufcle of the Ra- 
 dius to thofe of the Cubitus ; but thefe being 
 placed very deep among thofe of the Cubi- 
 tus, is the Reafon w^hy I have referved them 
 to the next Chapter. 
 
 C H A P. V. 
 
 Of the Mufcles ^h'tch lie upon the 
 Cubitus and Radius. 
 
 IT is proper to advertife the Reader^ that 
 I do not intend to follow the commoa 
 Method of Anatornifts, which is to exa- 
 mine iirft the Flexors and Extenfors of the 
 Carpus, then the Flexors and Extenfors of 
 the Fingers, but to purfue that Method which 
 Nature has made ufe of in the Dilpolition of 
 thefe Mufcles ; that is, to begin at fome pro- 
 per Place, and from thence go through with 
 the Mufcles in the Order they lie, till you 
 return to the fame Place from whence you 
 fct out : For the Cubitus and Radius are eve- 
 
172 The Method 
 
 ry where furrounded and inclofed with Muf- 
 cles, which muft be feparated in the fame 
 Order I Ihall dire<5t you, beginning at the 
 external Side of tht Cuifkus. 
 
 I v/ould have this general Rule obferved 
 concerning thofe Mufcles which have long 
 Tendons, to begin their Separation at the \Cen- 
 don^ which is the eafieft and befl Method. 
 Galen is of the fame Opinion, as is plain 
 from what he fays of the Flexors of the Car- 
 pus. Begin the Diffe^ion of thefe Mufcles^ 
 which Jerve tq bend the Wrift a little above the 
 Flexure of the foint^ becaufe there they ter- 
 minate m thin nervous Bodies, and difcover the 
 circumfcribed Extremities of their Tendons a- 
 rifing from thence ; then you are to feparate 
 them fro??i their fubjacent and furrowiding 
 Parts as far as their Extremities, as has been 
 already Jloewn. But Riolan is of another Way 
 of thinking, faying, That we fhotdd not be- 
 gin the DiJJeBion of a Mufcle from its Tendon -, 
 becaufe he imagines that a Mufcle may be di- 
 vided into two or more by this Method 
 of proceeding i but this is a trifling Objec- 
 tion, and may eafily be removed, if the A- 
 natpmifl is upon his Guard. 
 
 The 
 
of dlfjeclmg Bodies. 173 
 
 The Difpofition and Names of the Muf- 
 cles we here intend to treat of are as follow, 
 
 viz. 
 
 I. Cubit eus Externus. %. Pronator radii longtis 
 
 2.ExtenforIndicispro- 9. Radians Internus. 
 
 prius. 10. Palmaris. 
 
 ^.ExtenforminimiDi- 11, Sublimis. 
 
 gitipropriiis. 12. Profundi. 
 
 4. Extenfores Pollicis. 1 3 . Lumbricales. 
 
 5. Radiceus Externus^ 14. Flexor Pollicis. 
 
 6. Supinator Longus. 15. Cubiteus Internus. 
 J. Supinator Brevis. 16. ^adratiis, 
 
 i.CuBiTEVsExTER^ns^orExten/or Car- 
 pi Ulnaris, fo called becaufe it clofely adheres 
 to the poilerior Part of the Cubitus. It arifes 
 near the Anconeus , whofe Separation I fliew- 
 ed you in the preceding Chapter, whence it 
 is eafily diftinguifhed, and is inferted iij the 
 metacarpal Bone, under the little Finger. 
 You may raife this Mufcle, as has been al- 
 ready mentioned, by clearing the Tendon of 
 the fubjacent Parts, and efpecially of the 
 Membrane, which covers moft of the Ten- 
 dons, and alfo infinuates itfelf into the Muf- 
 cles, which it invelopes j therefore make a 
 
 longi- 
 
174 ^^^^ Method 
 
 longitudinal Incifion in this Membrane in that 
 Place where the white Line points between! 
 this Mufcle and the Extenjbr Digitorum^ and 
 feparate the Ciihiteiis from the Cubitus and 
 neighbouring Mufcle. 
 
 Before you proceed fartherj eiit that mem- 
 branous, tendinouSj and circular Ligament, 
 which is fituate near the Carpus^ and keeps 
 the Tendons of the Fingers in their Places. 
 It is called Armilla^ or the Bracelet y and is 
 very vifible on the Back of the Handy with 
 its oblique tranfverfe Fibres. When it is cut, 
 turn it afidCj that you may come at the Ten- 
 dons. 
 
 Clear now the Tendons afcending along 
 the Back of the Hand towards the Fingers of 
 their inveloping Membranes, put a Probe un- 
 der the four largeft ones, and raife them up, 
 and cut the Worillce^ with the Point of the 
 Knife, that unite them together^ all the Way 
 back to the Q/to/j, where you will find the 
 Difference between the Exf^?i/br Minimi Di^ 
 giti, IndiciSy and Carpi. Having feparated it as 
 fai as its Origine, which is in the external Con- 
 , dyle of the Himerus^ cut it. off, and trace its 
 Tendons to the Phalanges of the Fingers, in- 
 the Outfide of which you will find them firm- 
 
 \ly inferted. 
 
 2,- Ex-=- 
 
of dilJeB'wg Bodies. 175 
 
 2. Extensor Indicis Proprius, of 
 Indicator J which imparts its Tendon not on- 
 ly to the Fore, but alfo to the Middle-finger, 
 is to be feparated after the fame Manner. 
 
 3. Extensor Minimi Digiti Pro- 
 prius, which is a Kind of collateral auxi- 
 liary Mufcle to the Extenfor Communis ^ is al- 
 fo raifed after the fame Manner as the two 
 former. 
 
 Thefe two Mufcles, united together, cor- 
 refpond with the Flexor Profundus^ as the 
 former does with the Flexor Sublimis, there- 
 fore might properly enough be denominated 
 Extenfor Siiblimis and Profundus. 
 
 4. Extensores Pollicis, being three 
 in Number, and having one and the fame 
 Origine about the Middle of the Cubitus^ 
 marching jointly along the Radius^ and fepa- 
 rate only when they come near the Thumb, 
 one of thefe Tendons being inferted into the 
 third Phalanx of the Thumb, and the other 
 two into the fecond and firft Phalanges. 
 
 Thefe Mufcles are feparated as the for- 
 mer. 
 
 5. Radialis Externus, or the Ex- 
 tenfor Carpi Primus^ lies along the external 
 Angle of the Radius, hence its Name. It 
 
 arifes 
 
1^6 The Method 
 
 arifes from the external Condyle of the Hit- 
 meriis^ and about the Middk of the Radius 
 is divided i?ito two Tendons, therefore called: 
 Bicornis^ which are wrapt up in a Mem- 
 brane, and inferted into the Carpus and Me- 
 tacarpus. Galen will have this to be a dou- 
 ble Mufcie, becaufe it moves different Parts, 
 3tnd may be divided into two^ if any one 
 will give himfelf the Trouble. Therefore^ 
 in order to do this, make an liicifion in the 
 Vagina, and direcfting your Knife upward, 
 divide thefe Mufcks, then you will fee two 
 diftind; Mufcles, as Riolan alfo acknowledges 
 in his Enchiridion. Betwixt this and the next 
 following Mufcie, palTes a Nerve along the 
 Infide to the Thumb and Fore- finger, like- 
 wife a Vein and Artery, \thofe Pulfation is 
 felt in the Carpus. 
 
 6. Supinator Longus, which arifes a- 
 bove the external Apophyiis of the Humerus,' 
 and is inferted into the inferior Extremity of 
 the Radius. 
 
 7. Supinator Brevis lies under the for- 
 mer, has its Origine near the fame Place with 
 it, and, pafTmg over the Radius, is inferted 
 iftto the Middle of it, in the Infide. You- 
 •may raife the Supinator Longus from the Bre" 
 
of differing Bodies. 1^7 
 
 'His with the Knife, beginning at the Sides, 
 and continuing your Separation upward aud 
 downward. Having removed this Mufcle, 
 you will fooii fee the Supinator Bre'vis, 
 which immediately furrounds the Radius^ 
 and is wholly carnous both at its Origlne and 
 Infertion. If you intend to feparate it, bend 
 back the Hand, and fcrape it off from the 
 Radius, then cut it off at its Ongine and In- 
 fertion. Perhaps there will be no Occafion 
 for feparating it, becaufe, without toucliing 
 it, the reft of the Mufcles may be raifed. 
 
 8. Pronator PvAdii Longus, whofe 
 A(ftion is contrary to the former Pvlufcles, 
 arifes from the inner Condyle of the Hu- 
 merus, and defcending obliquely to the Ra- 
 dius, is inferted in its pofterior Part. The 
 Separation of this Mufcle is the fame v/ith 
 that of the former Mufcles, which are fur- 
 nifhed with long Tendons. 
 
 9. Radialis Internus, or Flexor 
 Carpi Radialis, being in an oppoRte Situa- 
 tion to that of the Radialis Extenms, takes 
 its Origine from the inner Condyle of the 
 Himerus, near to that of the abovcm.ention- 
 ed Mufcle, and paffing over the R^idius to 
 the Thumb, is inferted into the firft and 
 
 N fouah 
 
178 The Method 
 
 fourth metacarpal Bone. This is feparated 
 as the former Mufcles. 
 
 10. Palmaris arifes from the inner 
 Condyle of the Humerus, and has, near its 
 Origine, a llender fiefhy Belly of a pyrami- 
 dal Figure, but foon after degenerates into a 
 long thin Tendon, which, defcending ftraight 
 along the Sublimis, joins, in its Courfe, the 
 metacarpal Bone, fuftaining the Thumb ; 
 it afterward difappears, and is inferted, by 
 its nervous Fibres, into .the firft Condyle of 
 the Fingers. Make an Incifion in the Mem- 
 brane above the Tendon which envelopes the 
 Mufcles, and free the carnous Part of this 
 Mufcle from thofe which have the fame Ori- 
 gine with it -y then feparate it from the me- 
 tacarpal Bone, and lifting up the broad Ten- 
 don, cut it oif from the inner Tendons of 
 the Hand. 
 
 After having raifed this Mufcle, you will 
 fee a Nerve entring the Palm of the Hand 
 under the Thumb, and diftributing its 
 Branches, 'viz, two to the Fore and Middle- 
 Finger, and one to the Ring-finger. Under 
 the Abdudor of the Little-finger is another 
 Nerve, which fends two Branches to the 
 Ring, and one to the Little-finger, If you 
 
 intend 
 
of dijJeBmg'Bo-DiES, 179 
 intend to feparate them, follow their Courfe 
 and with a fharp Knife make a longitudinal 
 Incifion into the membranous Coat which 
 envelope them, then feparate them gently : 
 They creep along the Sides of the Fingers to* 
 their Extremities. 
 
 II. SuBLiMis, or Perforatus, which 
 bends the fecond Articulation of the Fingers 
 lies under the Falmaris, at its Origine, and 
 in its Progrefs, This, at its Origine, feems 
 to be only one Mufcle, but a little below the 
 Middle of the Fore-arm is divided into four 
 diftind: Mufcles^ that terminate into four 
 long flat Tendons of different Sizes. Thefe 
 Tendons being of a confiderable Length, 
 and having a long Way to go, wanted a 
 Kind of Defence, that they might not, dur- 
 ing their Courfe, be turned out of their Way • 
 therefore Nature has taken Care to prevent 
 this Inconvenience, by furnifhing them with 
 a double Ligament ; for in the Carpus they 
 are braced down by the Ligamentum annu- 
 lare ; and in the Fingers, kept within their due 
 Bounds by another circular Ligam.ent ; be- 
 fides which, they have Membranes that 
 unite them together. 
 
 N 2 12. Pro- 
 
i8o The Method 
 
 12. PiioFUNDi, or P erf or antes, which 
 bend the third Internode of the Fingers, are 
 in every Pvefpecl, like the former, except in 
 this only, that they are not perforated, but 
 perforate, therefore called Perforantes, and 
 Profundi^ becaiife they lie under the ^iibli^ 
 mis. The Adminiflration of thefe Mufcles 
 being the fame with that of the former, I 
 will thei efore treat of them jointly. Make 
 an Jncifion in that Ligament, which, ari- 
 fing at the Sides of the Fingers, furrounds 
 the Tendons j but take Care not to cut the 
 Tendons. Cut through the Ligamentinn an- 
 nulare^ under which thefe tendinous Twigs 
 pafs to the Fingers -, put a Probe under the 
 Tendons, and raife them all up 3 then de- 
 fire your Aiiiflant to hold them up, while 
 you feparate the Tendons, by cutting afun- 
 der the Membranes. They are divided at 
 firil into four, but each are fubdivided into 
 two leiTer Tendons, which mull: be alfo fe- 
 parated. You will eafily diflinguifli the In- 
 terflice with your Eyes, then cut through 
 the Membrane that unites them together; 
 lift up next, with a Probe, the Tendons of 
 the Perforatiis, and feparate the Mufcle to- 
 wards its Origine, where you are to cut it 
 
 off. 
 
of dtfjeSihig Bodies. i8i 
 
 off. Separate alfo the Ferforam from the 
 Ligament, which unites it with the Bones 
 of the Cubitus and Radius, but take Care 
 not to cut the Ligament in the Adminiftra- 
 tion. 
 
 13. LuMBRiCALEs, which bend the firfl: 
 Joint of the Fingers, owe their Origine to 
 the Tendons of the Profundus. Riolan fays 
 they arife from the annular Ligament, but I 
 could never yet obferve their Union with it ; 
 however, be that as it will, this not being a 
 proper Place for difputing the Matter, it is 
 certain that they clofely adhere to the Tendons 
 of the Profundus, from whence they mull: 
 be feparated • likewife from the Interofjei, 
 where you are to fearch for their Infer tion, 
 which is about the firfl Joint. 
 
 14. Flexor Poll ic is arifes internally 
 from the Middle of the Cubitus, and afcends 
 to the Thumb, under the "thenar, whofe 
 Bafinefs is to m^ove the iirfr Joint, and is 
 fometimes inferted in the fecond. The Ad- 
 miniflration of this Mafcle is the fame with 
 that of the former. 
 
 15. CuBiTEus Internus, cr Flexor 
 Carpi Alter, arifes laflly fiom the inner Con- 
 dyle of the Humerus, runs down along the 
 
 N 3 Vhui, 
 
iSz The Mi: T H o D 
 
 Vina J and terminates, by a long Tendon, in 
 
 the Os Orbiculare of the Carpus. 
 
 1 6. Qu^ADRATus, or Alter Pronator 
 Kadii, lying on the Inlideof the lower Ex- 
 tremity of the Fore-arm, makes its Ap- 
 pearance now after all the abovementioned 
 Mufcles are removed. It is fixed by one 
 Side or Edge to the Cubitus, and by the 
 other to the Radius, owing its Origine to 
 the firft, and its Infertion to the laft. As 
 there are no fubjacent Mufcles, I fee no, 
 great Occafion for feparating it= 
 
 CHAP. 
 
if differing Bodies. i 
 
 CHAP. VL 
 
 Of the Mufcks which are placed In 
 the Hand. 
 
 I 
 
 N the Hand are found fome fmall Muf- 
 cles, the Adminiftration of which fhall 
 be the Subje(5l of this Chapter. 
 
 1 . Abdudior minimi Di~ 4 . Hypothenar^ or Alter 
 
 giti. AdduStor Poiiicis, 
 
 2 . Thenar^ or AbduBor 5. Abducior Indicis» 
 
 PoUicis. 6. Interojj'ei, 
 
 3. Antithenar, or Ad- 
 
 duBor PoUicis. 
 
 I. Abductor Minimi DiGiTi, being 
 fituate under the Little-finger, arifes from 
 the Carpus^ but chiefly from two Bones^ 
 one of which is fituate near the little Finger, 
 the other under the Little and Ring-finger % 
 and is inferted in the firft Internode of the 
 Little-finger, To raife this MufclCj begin at 
 N 4 the 
 
1^4 ^^^ Method 
 
 the Back of the Hand, and feparate it from 
 the metacarpal Bone, then cut it off at its 
 Origlne and Infertion. 
 
 2. Thenar, or Abdu5lor Follicis^ being 
 lituate on the Side of the Thumb, arifes 
 from that Bone v/hich fupports the Thumb, 
 and is inferted in the fecond Joint of the 
 Thumb. The Adminiilration of this Muf- 
 cle is the fame with the former. 
 
 3. Antithenar, or AdduSior Pollicis, 
 being fituate on the Back of the Hand, pulls 
 the Thumb to the Fore-finger, and runs 
 obliquely from the fourth metacarpal Bone 
 to the firfl of the Thumb. Bring the 
 Thumb gently to the Fore-finger, then fe- 
 parate this Mufcle from the AbduSior Indi- 
 cis, which are eafily diflinguifhed from each 
 other by the different Pofition of their Fibres, 
 and cut it off at its Origine from the meta- 
 carpal Bone. 
 
 4. Hypothenar, or Alter Addudior 
 PoIUciSy being fituate in the Palm of the 
 Hand, pulls the Thumb to the Fingers, and 
 takes its Origine from the fecond metacar- 
 pal Bone. The Separation of this Mufcle is 
 the fame v/ith that of the preceding j which 
 
 done„ 
 
of differing BODIES, 185 
 
 done, cut it off at the Thumb, or then you 
 cannot fo eafily raife the 
 
 5. Abductor Indicis, the Origine of 
 which is cut off at the fame Time with 
 the Thumb -, therefore you need only fepa- 
 rate tliis Mufcle from the metacarpal Bone. 
 
 6. Interossei are fix in Number, viz, 
 three internal, and three external ; but thefe 
 cannot be feparated till you divide the Car- 
 pus from the Metacarpus 3 therefore disjoin 
 thefe two with a Knife, then cut through 
 the Ligaments which unite the metacarpal 
 Bones above and below ; then you will, 
 without any Direction, fee the Difference 
 between the internal and the external Inter^ 
 ojjei. 
 
 CHAR 
 
1 86 The Method 
 
 CHAR VII. 
 
 Of the Mufcles that hend the Head, 
 
 THE Head, by its own Weight, be- 
 ing apt to incline forward , has 
 therefore only one Pair of Mufcles ; 
 but to keep it ere6t, or fupport it, is fur- 
 niflied with more, placed for that IntentioHr 
 in the Neck. That Pair fituate in the an- 
 terior Part, is called Mastoideus, which 
 immediately appears upon feparating the muf- 
 cular Expanlion : Its Origine is cut off at 
 the fame Time you remove the Sternum^ 
 which you are to take hold of, and feparate 
 it from the fubjacent Mufcles, but efpecially 
 from the Scalenus 3 from thence you are to 
 proceed to its Infertion in the malloide Pro^ 
 cefs. 
 
 In the pofterior Part of the Neck are fix 
 Pair of Mufcles, generally afcribed to the 
 Head, viz, 
 
 I, Spk- 
 
of differing Bodies. 185^ 
 
 1. Splejiius. 4. Refills Minor, 
 
 2. Compkxus. 5. Obliqmis Superior, 
 
 3. Re5ius Major. 6. Obliqiim Inferior, 
 
 1. Splenius, which furrounds the po^ 
 fterior Part of the Neck, immediatly ap- 
 pears upon removing the trapezius and 
 Bhomboides. It arifes from the fpinal Opo- 
 phyfis of the cervical and dorfal Vertebrce, and is 
 inferted into the Occiput. Begin the Separa- 
 tion of this Mufcle on that Side next the ^^, 
 defcending tov^ards its Origine, vi^hich you 
 are to cut off ; then raife its Infertion, but 
 take Care you do not feparate the next fol- 
 lowing Mufcle. 
 
 2. CoMP LEXUS lies immediately under 
 the former, and is fo called, becaufe it con- 
 tains and comprehends as it were both the 
 ReSli and Obliqui. It has the fame Origine 
 and Infertion with the former Pair 5 there^ 
 fore the Separation is the fame. 
 
 The Compkxus are no fooner removed, but 
 the ReBi^ which are divided into Majores 
 and Minores^ and the Obliqui, into Superio- 
 res and Inferiores, immediately make their 
 Appearance, Hence it is, that G^/^;2Juftly 
 
 wondered 
 
i88 The Method 
 
 wondered how Lycus could obferve the Re^i 
 without taking Notice of the Obliqui. 
 
 3. Rectus Major arifes from the Spine 
 of the fecond Vertebra of the Neck, afcends 
 obliquely to the Occiput^ where it is inferted, 
 and covers in a Manner the 
 
 4. Rectus Minor, which differs only 
 from the former in Origine, this arifing from 
 the firft cervical Vertebra. If you intend to 
 Separate ReBus Major and Minor ^ put your 
 left Thumb upon the one, and Fore-finger 
 upon the other, and thus pull them dov/n- 
 ward, then cut through the diflended Fibres 
 with the Point of the Knife, and feparate 
 the Rectus Major either at its Origlne or In- 
 fertion. 
 
 5. Obltquus Superior arifes fiom the 
 tranfverfe Procefsof the Atlas, and terminates 
 in the Occiput, near the ReBus Major. This is 
 vifible enough without any Separation. 
 
 6. Obliquus Inferior, is by fome 
 reckoned among the Mufcles belonging to 
 the Head, but without any Reafon, becaufe 
 thefe Mufcles do not reach the Craniinn -, 
 hence they ought not to be ranked among 
 thofe of the Head -, by the fame Rule, you 
 may place the Tranfverfalis Colli, which has 
 
 the 
 
of diJJ'eBing Bodies. 189 
 
 the fame Infertion in the firfl Vertebra of the 
 Neckj with the Obltqims Major ; yet I will 
 follow the common Method in placing them 
 among thofe belonging to the Head. They 
 arife from the fpinal Procefs of the fecond 
 cervical Vertebra, from thence they afcend 
 obliquely to, and are inferted in the tranf- 
 verfe Procefs of the firfl: Vertebra, where the 
 Obliqiii Superiores take their Origine. 
 
 Obferve that thefe three Mufcles, viz» 
 the ReSfi Majores, and the Obliqiii Siiperi- 
 ores and Inferiores, taken jointly, form a 
 Triangle, whereof the Obliqiim Inferior is 
 the Bafe, and the reft form the Sides ; there- 
 fore they are eafily diftinguifhed from each 
 other, efpecially lince the Re5liis makes 
 that Side of the Triangle which is next the 
 Spine. 
 
 C PI A P. 
 
ipo The Method 
 
 CHAP. VIIL 
 
 Of the Mufcles of the N e g k. 
 
 TH E Neck has four Pair of Mufcles^ 
 the iirft two Pair fituate anteriorly 
 lower for bending it, and the laft 
 two Pair placed pofleriorly for extending it„ 
 
 J. Scale?iuSi t^. Spinalis. 
 
 2. Longus. 4. 'Trajifuerfalis. 
 
 The two firft Pair muft be raifed whild 
 the Subjed; lies upon its Back. 
 
 I. Scalenus, arifmg from the firil Ribb- 
 and terminating in the tranfverfe ProceiTes of 
 the cervical Vertebra:, becomes confpicuous 
 as foon as you have dilTecfled the abovemen- 
 tioned Mufcles 3 and the Method of railing 
 this Mufcle is plain of itfelf. But if you 
 deiign to difled; this Mufcle while the other 
 Parts remain intire, feveral Things mufl be 
 obferved. The chief Particular to be taken 
 notice of, is the Paffage of the axillary Vef- 
 fels through this Mufcle to the Arm ; there- 
 fore 
 
of diJjeBtng BODIES. 191 
 fore you muft take Care not to hurt them, 
 otherwife you muft expe<5l to meet with an 
 EfFufion of Blood. Firft raife the Mafioi- 
 deus, of which already, then the Levator 
 Scapulcey fituate laterally on the Outfide, and 
 arifing in the fame Place where this is infert- 
 ed ; afterward feparate the Scalenus from the 
 Rib, and cut it off at its Origine. 
 
 2. Long us, fituate laterally along the 
 Fore-fide of all the cervical Vertebra^ and 
 fome of the fuperior dorfal Verfebrce, arifes 
 generally from the fifth Vertebra of the 
 Back, but Nature varies here j becaufe it 
 fometimes arifes from the fourth, and fome- 
 times from the third, and is inferted in the 
 Tubercle of the Atlas^ or in the Occiput^ as 
 has been obferved by Columbus, You are to 
 feparate this Mufcle, by abrading it from the 
 Sides of the Vertebrce. 
 
 Between the Atlas and the firft dorfal Ver^ 
 tebra^ you will fee the cervical Veftels paf- 
 fing through the Perforatus made in the tranf- 
 verfe ProcelTes of the cervical Vertebrce. 
 
 If you incline to have a full View of the 
 two Extenfors of the Neck, the Body muft be 
 turned upon its Face ; however, before you 
 come at this, not only the Skin, but the 
 
 'Trapezius, 
 
ip^ The Method 
 
 Trapezius, Rhomboides, Serrafus Fofiicta Su^ 
 perior, Splenius^ and Complexus, muft be re-^ 
 moved, with a Part of the Semi-fpinalis. 
 
 3. Spinalis appears firft in its natural 
 Situation, after thefe Obftacles are out of the 
 Way, fixed to the fuperior Spines of fome 
 of the cervical and dorfal Vertebra. 
 
 4. Transversalis, fituate under the 
 former, and filling up that Space betv^een 
 the tranfverfe and oblique Procefies, arifes 
 from the fix fuperior tranfverfe ProcefTes of 
 the dorfal Vertebrae, and is inferted into all 
 thofe of the Neck. Raife this Mufcle from 
 the Spinalis, by making an Incifion in that 
 Line by w^hich they are diflinguifhed, v^hich 
 is eafily found if you feparate the Spinalis 
 Dorji, under which lies concealed the Ori- 
 gine of lihsTranfuerfalis, and then carry your 
 Separation upward. Afterward feparate it 
 from the tranfverfe ProcefTes, but do not cut 
 off the tendinous Produd:ions. If you raife 
 the Spinalis Colli from the Tranjverfalis, it 
 requires no farther Preparation. 
 
 CHAR 
 
of difje^tng BODIES. 193 
 
 C H A Po IX. 
 
 X^f the' Method of feparatlng the 
 Skin and the Fat from the Foot. 
 
 E who underftood and retained what 
 was faid in the iiril Chapter of the 
 firfl Book, will foon find that he is 
 fufficiently acquainted with the greatefl Part 
 of this Operation 3 for this is fo near a 
 Kin to that of the former, that they will 
 admit of very little, if any Difference; 
 which though fmall, yet muft be explained 
 here, left the Omiffion thereof fhould lead 
 the young Anatomift into an Error. 
 
 Begin therefore your Incifion of the Skin 
 at the Pubis, and bring it down along the 
 Infide of the Thigh, Leg, and Foot, to 
 the Mola ; from thence turn a little toward 
 the back Part, and end in the Os Calds, be- 
 hind the Malleolus. Make afterward another 
 incifion, fo as to form a right Angle with 
 the former, diffeding the Skin of the Foot 
 to the Nail of the great Toe ; this done, 
 O feparate 
 
1 94 The Method 
 
 feparate the Skin after the fame Manner as 
 you did in the Hand j but the Adminiftra- 
 tion is more difficult in the Leg and Back of 
 the Foot, becaufe in thofe Places there is ge- 
 nerally a foft fubjacent Fat. Galen did not 
 fo much as touch the Skin in the Bottom of 
 the Foot, nor in the Palm of the Hand, on 
 account of the tendinous Expanfion of the 
 Tlantaris ; but there was no Occafion for 
 fuch an over Care, becaufe the Skin may be 
 eafily feparated without hurting that Tendon. 
 
 You are likewife to obferve, that there is 
 in the Thigh a membranous Mufcle invelop- 
 ing feveral other Mufcles, hence denominated 
 Fafcia Lata. This Mufcle, though carnous 
 at its Origine, yet foon degenerates into a 
 broad Tendon, or rather a Membranous Ex- 
 panfion, which you mull take particular Care 
 of, otherwife you may, by Miftake, diffedt 
 it for the Fanniculus Carnojus^ which I have 
 often ictn. done. 
 
 Therefore, to avoid falling into this Error, 
 when you defign to feparate the Fat, make 
 an Incifion at the Origine of this Mufcle, 
 \f hich is at the inferior Spine of the Os lli- 
 tim, but do not let the Knife go too deep, 
 left you fliould wound the membranous Ex- 
 
 panlion 
 
oj di[feBtng Bodies. 195 
 
 paiillon of the Mufcle ; and if you per- 
 ceive the mufcular Flefh denudated, you 
 may reft fatisfied that your Incilion is of a 
 proper Depth. 
 
 Likewife when you feparate the Fat on 
 the Bottom of the Foot, you are to begin 
 on that Side of the great Toe next the other 
 Toes, and take Care not to remove with 
 the Fat that nervous Expanlion, which be- 
 ing ftretched along the Sole of the Foot, 
 and interwoven, as it were, with the Fat, 
 is inferted into the firft Joints of the Toes. 
 Round the Os Calcis lies a large Q^ntity of 
 folid Fat, which muft be removed, before- 
 you can have a full View of the Termina» 
 tion of the great Tendon. 
 
 C H A Fo 
 
196 The M E T H o B 
 
 CHAR X. 
 
 Of the Mufcks of the Thorax and 
 Loins. 
 
 THE Mufcles of the "Thorax, called 
 by others the Mufcles of Refpira- 
 tion, are numerous, and of diffe- 
 rent Kinds : For it is faid, that thefe Muf- 
 cles, fubfervient to Respiration, are the 
 terrains Major, of which already among 
 the Mufcles of the Scapula, Siibclavii, ^ri-^ 
 angular is, Intercojlalis, Diaphragm, ex- 
 plained in the fecond Book, Serratus Pojiicus 
 Superior, and the Serratus Pojiicus Inferior, 
 therefore we have only the two laft to treat 
 of. 
 
 Serratus Posticus Superior, lies 
 under the Khomhoides, and arifes by a broad 
 yiponeurojis from the three inferior Vertebras 
 of the Neck, and the firfl of the Back ; 
 from thence this Aponeurojis pafles over, and, 
 in fome Meafure, covers the Mufcles of the 
 
 Loins, whence fome iiave taken it for a Li- 
 gament, 
 
of dijJeEiing BODIES. 197 
 
 gament. But it is inferted bv carnous Di- 
 gitations into three of the true Ribs, which 
 it pulls upward. The Separation of this 
 Mufcle depends wholly upon railing it at its 
 Origine, which being done, you cannot mifs 
 of finding its Infertion. 
 
 Serratus Posticus Inferior lies un- 
 der the LatiJJtmus Dorfi^ and is firmly united 
 to its Aponeurojis, which being feparated, it 
 makes its Appearance. This Mufcle takes its 
 Origine from the laft Vertebra of the Back, 
 and the firfl: of the Loins, by a broad Apo- 
 neurofis like the former Mufcle, and covers 
 the Mufcles of the Loins ; it is likewife in- 
 ferted by flefhy Digitations into the four in- 
 ferior Ribs, which pulls it upward. The 
 Adminiftration of this Mufcle is the fame 
 with that of the former. 
 
 We now come to the Mufcles of the 
 Loins, which are, 
 
 1. Sacro-Liimbaris. 4. Semi-Jpinalis, 
 
 2. LongiJJimus Dorji. 5. ^adratus Lumbo- 
 
 3. Sacer, rum. 
 
 I. Sacro-Lumbaris, having the utter- 
 moil Seat among thofe Mufcles on the Ribs,^ 
 O 1 arifes 
 
ipS Tke Method 
 
 arifes from the external Margin of the Cofta 
 OJJis Ilium y from thence it afcends, and fends 
 its tendinous Portions and Digitations to all 
 the Ribs. Separate this Mufcle from the 
 Longijjtmus Dorji, from which it is diftin- 
 guifhed by a yellowiih Line, occafioned by 
 the intervening Fat j the Tradt of which you 
 are to follow in the Adminiftration, and then 
 you are fure not to mifs. The Separation of 
 this Mufcle at its Origine from the Longtjji" 
 rniis DorJi is attended with fome Difficulty ; 
 becaufe the Origines of thefe Mufcles are fo 
 clofely intermixed with the Sacer, that it is 
 almofl impoiTible to make an exad: Diftinc- 
 tion between them. It mufl be intirely rai- 
 fed from the Ribs, except the fmall nervous 
 Portions, which mufl be left. In the Loins 
 you may feparate it from the fubjacent ^^^- 
 dratus by a lateral Incifion, 
 
 2. LoNGissiMus Dor SI, being conti- 
 guous to the Sacer^ reaches along the Back 
 to the Neck, and fometimes as far as the 
 Occiput ; it is fixed to the Spines of the Os 
 Sacrum, and to thofe of the Loins, by a 
 tendinous Expanfion. Make firfl an Incifion 
 in this Aponeurojis, and feparate it from the 
 fubjacent Sacer, which will lead ycu to the 
 
 fuperior 
 
of dlUfeEihig Bodies. 199 
 
 fuperior Parts, and fliew you where it Is ta 
 be divided from the neighbouring Muicles ^ 
 then feparate the carnous Part from the 
 Bones, to come at a Sight of the numerous 
 Fajcicidi. 
 
 3. Sacer being next to this both in Ori- 
 glne and Progrefs, arifes from the Os Sacrum ; 
 hence fo called. It covers the tranfverfe 
 Procefles of the Loins, and from thence 
 reaches to fome of the dorfal Vertebrce un- 
 der the Semi-fpinalis, It is fcarce worth the 
 while to feparate this Mufcle, becaufe there 
 is nothing elfe under it but Bones. 
 
 Semi -SPINALIS, whofe Origine being 
 placed under the Extremity of the former, 
 arifes from the fpinal Procefles of the Loins, 
 adheres to all the dorial Vertebra^ and (huts 
 itfelf up between the Spinalis and Tranfver- 
 falis. If you have a Mind to feparate it, 
 fcrape it off with the Knife from the Bones. 
 Riolan calls this Mufcle the Spinalis^ and de- 
 duces its Origine from the Spines of the Os 
 Sacrum. 
 
 5. QuADRATus Lup,iBORUM, being in- 
 tirely carnous, appears after removing the 
 Origines of the LongiJJimus Dorji and Sa- 
 cer i it arifes from the Spine of the Os Bi^ 
 
 O 4 tW7^ 
 
200 The Method 
 
 "Um^ and is inferted into the inferior Rib and 
 tranfverfe Apophyfes of the Lumbar Vertebra. 
 To raife this Mufclc, make an Incifion at the 
 Spine of the Os Iliwn ; andj having feparated 
 it from the tranfverfe Proccffes, cut it off 
 from the inferior Rib. 
 
 CHAP. XL 
 
 Of the Mufcles of the Thigh and 
 Le g. 
 
 I Thought it abfolutely neceffary to bring 
 thefe tv70 Parts into one Chapter, be- 
 caufe the Adminiftraticn of the Mufcles 
 of one, cannot be performed without the 
 other, as v/ill appear from what follows. 
 The Mufcles we intend to treat of here are, 
 
 1. Sartorhis. y. Gracilis. 
 
 2. Membranofus. 8. Pfoas Magnus. 
 
 3. Rectus. 9. Pfoas Parvus. 
 
 4. Vajlus Exterftus. 1.0. liiaciis Internus. 
 £j. Vaftus Internus. 11. triceps. 
 bTCrureus. 12. Pe5fineus. 
 
 13. G/«- 
 
of di[feSiifig Bodies, ap i 
 
 I'^.Glutceiis Maximus. ig. Biceps. 
 
 J 4. Gluteus Me dins. 20. Seminervofus. 
 
 15. Glutceus Minimus, 2.1. Semimembranofus. 
 
 16. Iliaciis Ext emus. 22. Triceps. 
 
 1 J. Obturator Intermis. 23. Obturator Exter- 
 18, ^adratus. nus, 
 
 J. SartoriuSj or FafcialiSy or Sutorius^, 
 arifes from the inferior Spine of the Os Ei- 
 UfUy and running obliquely over the Mufcles 
 of the Thigh, is inferted in the Inlide of the 
 Head of the 'Tibia. This Mufclc may be ea^ 
 fily feparated with the Hand, by putting your 
 Finger between this and the ReBus^ and 
 parting them by moving your Finger up- 
 ward and downward s then cut it oiF at its 
 Origine and Infertion. 
 
 2. Membra NO sus, or Fafcia Lata^ coverg 
 a great Part of the Thigh, elpecially on the 
 Outfide. I place its Infertion in the Tibia ; 
 but Riolan will have it reach as far as the Foot. 
 It arifes from the Spine of the Os Ilium, near 
 the Sartorius, where you are to begin 
 your Incifion, and feparate its carnous Part, 
 which lies concealed among the other Muf- 
 cles ; then feparate the nervous Membrane 
 ■with the Knife, which clofely adheres to that 
 
 Part 
 
aoi The Method 
 
 Part where thefe two Mufcles meet 3 it like- 
 wife firmly adheres at the Flexure^ under the 
 Knee, and there feems to be infer ted. The 
 Leg mufl: be often turned in this Adminiftra-. 
 tion, becaufe this Membrane invefls the Thigh 
 behind and before. 
 
 Before you proceed farther, you will ob- 
 ferve fome Blood Veffels pafs over the Ojja 
 Innomtnata along with the Ffoas and Iliacus 
 Internum ; from hence thefe Branches called 
 the Cniraln defcend to the Foot, which, af- 
 ter got beyond the Os Pubis ^ fend forth a 
 long Branch, called the Saphcena^ that runs 
 down along the Iniide of the Thigh and Leg 
 to the Foot ; but the Trunk goes deeper be- 
 tween the Vajius hiternus and Criireus, near 
 the Tendon of the Iliacus Internus, 
 
 3. Re^uSy fo called on account of its 
 flreight Situation in the Body j arifes from 
 the inferior Spine of the Os liium^ from 
 thence defcends flreight down upon the Cm- 
 reus, between the Vafiiis Externus and Inter ^ 
 VMS to the Thigh. This Mufcle is eafily fe^ 
 parated like the Sartorius, either with your 
 Fingers, or the Handle of a Knife. 
 
 4. Vastus Externus arifes from the 
 Trochanter Major ^ and from thence defcends 
 
 along 
 
of differing Bodies. 203 
 
 along the Infide of the Thigh to the Tibia. 
 To raife this Mufcle, begin on the Infide, 
 and turn the Thigh, then feparate it from 
 the Biceps, to which it clofely adheres ; af- 
 terward free it from the Crureus in that Place 
 where thefe two Mufcles are united too-ether 
 by a white Line. 
 
 5. Vastus Intern us is placed on the 
 oppolite Side, and takes its Origine from the 
 Trochanter Minor. It is alfo diftinguidied 
 by a white Line from the Crureus, where 
 you are to feparate it, then behind from Gra- 
 cilis and Triceps. 
 
 6. Crureus lies immediately along the 
 Qj Femoris, from which it mufl be raifed 
 with the Knife. Thefe three Mufcles, along 
 with the KeBus, unite into one Tendon, 
 which furrounds the Patella, and fixes it to 
 the Knee j therefore thefe three Mufcles be- 
 ing fo nearly contiguous to one another, that 
 they may be reckoned a Triceps, you may 
 thus feparate them at one Operation. Sepa- 
 rate the Patella on the Infide, near the Flex- 
 ure, from the Tibia, and continue your Se- 
 paration, by afcending gradually under the 
 Vajius Intermts. When you come to the Os 
 Fe?mriSy clear it of the Fleilij and then re- 
 peat 
 
204 The Method 
 
 peat the fame Operation on the oppoiite Side^ 
 under the Vafim Externus. Cut off the 
 Heads of the Vajii, and free the Crureus from 
 the Bone, but take Care not to injure the 
 Head of the Biceps, which Hes on the Out^ 
 iide. Having removed thefe Mufcles, you 
 may feparate them into their proper Divi^ 
 fions. 
 
 7. Gracilis, fo called from its being a 
 thin Mufcle lying in a ftreight Line along the 
 Infide of the Thigh, between the Os Pubis 
 and Knee ; it is likewife termed by Riohn^ 
 Pojiicus^ to diftingtiifh it from the ReBus. It 
 arifes near the Synthefis of the Os Pubis, 
 and is inferted into the Infide of the Head of 
 the T^ibia. This Mufcle is eafily feparated 
 'AA-a. duixriv, or with the fubjacent Membrane. 
 Having diffeded thefe Mufcles, return up- 
 ward, and take a View of the PJsias and Hi- 
 actis Interniis. 
 
 8. Psoas Magnus, is that round Mufcle 
 which arifes from the Lumbar Vertebrce, and 
 running over .the Os Ilium, is inferted between 
 the two Trochanters. Upon this you will of- 
 ten meet with another Mufcle, firfl difcover- 
 <ed by Riolan^ and called 
 
 9. Psoas 
 
of diJJeBhig Bodies. 205 
 
 9. Psoas Parvus, which muft be raifed. 
 it ariles by a fhort Tendon from the firft 
 Lumbar Vertebra, from thence it runs down, 
 but foon after degenerates into a long thin 
 broad Tendon, which is inferted into the Crijla 
 of the Os Pubis. I have obferved thisMufcle 
 in a Monkey to be of the fame Magnitude with 
 the Pfoas Magnus, which is of great Service 
 for thefe Geftures that Creature puts itfelf 
 into. You may feparate the Tendon of this 
 Mufcle, placed above the Pfoas Magnus, mrx 
 ^ufKTiv with your Finger, then cut it off at 
 its Origine and Infertion ; otherwife it will 
 hinder you in railing the following Mufcles. 
 
 When you intend to feparate the Pfoas 
 Magnus, begin and free it from the Verte- 
 bra, then raife it laterally from the Biacus In- 
 ternus, defcending gradually to the Os Femoris, 
 till you come at its Infertion. In the mean 
 time negled: not obferving that Nerve which 
 arifes from the Medulla Spinalis, between the- 
 third and fourth Lumbar Vertebra, pafles over 
 the Sinus of the Os Bium along with this 
 Mufcle, and is the Caufe of that Numbnefs 
 in the Thigh, Leg, and Foot, felt by thofe 
 who are afflided with the Stone, 
 
 10. IliA'» 
 
ao6 the Method 
 
 10. Iliacus Internus affifls alfo in 
 covering and filling up the Cavity of the ///- 
 tijn, called by Riolan the Belly. It defcends 
 the fame Way v^ith the Pjoas above the If- 
 chium to the Os Femoris, and is inferted at 
 the Side of the Trochanter Minor. The Ad- 
 miniftration of this Mufcle is performed by^ 
 making an Incifion at the Margin of the Os 
 Ilmm, then freeing it from the Bone, which 
 continue to its Infertion. During this Ope- 
 ration, turn the Thigh a little inward. While 
 the Body lies on its Back, there is another 
 Mufcle to be examined, which goes by the 
 Name of 
 
 11. Triceps, but Riolan will have it cal- 
 led ^adriceps^ or ^ladrigeminus, becaufe it- 
 has four Origines, and as many Infertions 5 
 but he adds to this the Lividus^ which others 
 reckon a particular Mufcle ; this he acknow- 
 ledges, and fays, that it feems to be a fepa- 
 rate Mufcle, and therefore gives it the Name 
 of 
 
 12. Pectineus, which arifes from th^ 
 Peclen, or fuperior Part of the Os Fiibis^ 
 defcends along the Infide of the Os Femoris 
 to the inferior Fpiphyfis, where it is inferted. 
 If you reckon it a particular Mufcle, you 
 
 may 
 
of differing Bodies. 207 
 
 may difTedt it feparately from the Triceps, 
 which is eafilj/ done, by making ai; Incifion 
 into that Membrane which unites them. But 
 if you reckon it along with the Uriceps^ this 
 Operation muft be laid afide till the poflerior 
 Mufcles are raifed. 
 
 But before you leave this Place, you fhould 
 take Notice of fome remarkable Branches of 
 Blood Veflels, which pafs along the Union of 
 the 'Triceps and FeBineus to the poflerior 
 Paris, and being joined by a Nerve under the 
 Flexure of the Knee, hide themfelves under 
 the Gajierocnemii. To come at a Sight of 
 thefe VelTels, turn the Leg obliquely out- 
 ward. 
 
 Turn now the Body upon its Face, upon 
 account of the Mufcles lituatc in the pofteri- 
 or Parts, and the firft Mufcle you are to be- 
 gin with is the 
 
 13. Gluteus Maximus, which partly 
 rifes from the Os Ilium, partly from the Os 
 Sacrum J covers Part of the Gliitaus Medius^ 
 and defcends to that Space of the Os Femoris 
 between both Trochanters. To finifh the Ad- 
 miniftration of this Mufcle the fooner, begin 
 at the external Side, make a flreight Incifion 
 in its Membrane^ which is very firong, then 
 
 feparate 
 
'loS The Method 
 
 feparate it with your Finger as far as its CirU 
 gine, which cut off, by beginning from the 
 Spine of the Os Ilium, and proceeding to the 
 Os Sacrum, and trace afterward its Infertion,- 
 which is below the Trochanter Major, to 
 which it is firmly joined, it mufl be therefore 
 Separated with the Knife. 
 
 i4» Gluteus Medius arifes from th6 
 iniddle Dorfum of the Os Ilium, covers the 
 Glutueus Minimus, and is inferted into the 
 Trochanter Major. The Adminiflration of 
 this Mufcle is almoft the fame with that of 
 the preceding ; but take Care you do riot, at 
 the fame Time, feparate the Pyriformis, 
 which firmly adheres to the pofterior Part of 
 this Mufcle. A Vein coming from the in- 
 terior Parts, and paffing between thefe Muf- 
 cles, will point out to you the Interflice. 
 
 15. Gluteus Minimus is fituate on the 
 Outfide of the Os Ilium, under the two for- 
 mer, afid paffing over the Head of the Os 
 Femoris, is inferted into the upper Edge of 
 the Trochanter Major. Riolan thinks this 
 Mufcle needs not be feparated, becaufe no- 
 thing lies under it -, but if you have a Mind 
 to it, you may free it from the Bone with the 
 
 Back 
 
of diffeSihg Bodies. 209 
 
 Back of the Knife, and feparate its Adhe- 
 iion from other Parts. 
 
 After thefe come the ^adrigeminl and 0^- 
 turatores. The iirft of the ^adrigemini is 
 
 i6. Iliacus Externus, or Pyriformis^ 
 which arifes round and carnous from the po- 
 flerior Part of the Os Sacrum^ but contradting 
 foon after in Breadth, is inferted by a flrong 
 Tendon into the Cavity of the Trochanter 
 Major, Separate the Sides of this Mufcle 
 from the fecond ^adrigemini^ continue your 
 Separation to its Origine, and there cut it off 
 Near this Mufcle you will fee the thickeft 
 Nerve of the Body paffing along the Os Fe- 
 moris, and from thence to the Tii>ia. It 
 marches in the Middle, between the Biceps, 
 Semimembranofus, and Seminervofiis, diftri- 
 buting its fmall Branches to the adjacent 
 Parts J but it divides into two Branches a 
 little above the Knee, one of which defcends 
 along the Inlide of the Leg to the Foot, the 
 other abfconds above the PopUteus under the 
 Gajlerocnemius and Soleus. 
 
 The fecond and third ^ladrigetnini are unit- 
 ed at their Origine, Middle, and Infertion, 
 and only diftinguifhed from each other by a 
 white Line, which being cut, the Tendon 
 P of 
 
^io The Method 
 
 of the Obturator Internus makes its Appear- 
 ance. Some Anatomifts will not allow thefe 
 to be reckoned proper Mufcles, but only a 
 carnous Involucrum or Bag for the Obturator 
 Internus^ whence it has gone under the Name 
 of Burjalis by fome, and by others that of 
 Marfupialis. You may difTedl thefe three 
 Mufcles at once -, but here you are to ob- 
 ferve, that there is a Foramen in the Os Coxce^ 
 to the internal Labium of which is fixed 
 
 1 7.OBTURATOR Internus, which maybe 
 raifed by introducing the Knife into the Pel- 
 'visj and freeing it from the Bone, over which 
 it pafTes backward ; continue feparating it in 
 this Tra6t, till you come to the fecond and 
 third ^adrigemini^ one whereof lies above, 
 and the other below the Obturator^ which 
 they furround ; remove them along with it, 
 then you will come to their Infertion, which 
 is in the Cavity of the Trochanter Major, 
 Having raifed thefe Mufcles from the Bone, 
 you may feparate them if you think proper, 
 and divide this carnous Bag into two Parts. 
 
 i8. Qu_ADRATUs is the fourth of the 
 
 Sluadrigemini, and is fituate near the fecond 
 
 'and third. Riolan fays, they are about two 
 
 .. Inches diftant from the former Mufcles, but 
 
 they 
 
of difjeEi'mg Bodies. 211 
 
 they feem to lie clofs to one another when 
 carefully viewed. Thefe being removed, you 
 will foon fee where you are to feparate the 
 ^adratiis from the fubjacent Obturator Ex~ 
 terniis. Therefore begin your Adminiftra- 
 tion on the upper Side, raife the ^adratus 
 with a Hook, then introduce your Knife in 
 the white Line, which is the Mark of Di- 
 flindion between the one and the other, and 
 free it from the fubjacent Mufcle ; afterward 
 cut it off at its Origine. The Adminiftration 
 of the Obturator Externus muft be let alone 
 till the Triceps is removed. 
 
 In the pofterior Part of the Femur you 
 will fee the Biceps^ Semmervofus, and Semi- 
 membranofus. 
 
 19. Biceps, whofe firft, or longeft Head, 
 is fixed to the Tubercle of the Os IJcbium, 
 and the fecond, or fhorteft, to the Os Femo- 
 ris, is placed near the following Mufcles. Se- 
 parate the longefl Head from the Semimem-. 
 branofus and the Seminervojus^ and cut it off 
 from the Tubercle of the Os Ifchiiim. The 
 fhorter Head adhering firmly to the Os Femo- 
 ris^ mufl therefore be carefully raifed from 
 the Bone with the Back of the Knife \ af- 
 P 2 terward 
 
212, The M ET H o i> 
 
 terward cut off the Infer tion of this Mufclc 
 
 from the T^ibia. 
 
 20. Seminervosus, 7 
 
 c r Are contigu- 
 
 2 1. OEMIMEMBRANOSUS, ^ ^ 
 
 Gus to the former Mufcle, they have the 
 fame Origine, Progrefs^ and Infertion, but 
 differ in this, that the former is fituate on 
 the Outfide, and has a long (lender Tendon 
 towards its Infertion ; but this is placed on 
 the Infide, near the Triceps, and has a broad 
 Aponeurofis at its Origine. Separate thefe 
 Mufcles from the Triceps, and from each o- 
 ther }i«T« ^«po-iv, or with the fubjacent Mem- 
 branes. 
 
 22. Triceps, fo called from having three 
 Heads, and as many Infertions. The three 
 Heads arife from different Parts of the 0[jo. 
 Pubis J the iirft adheres to the fuperior An- 
 gle, the fecond to the Middle of the Bone^ 
 and the third to the inferior Part. Their 
 Origines, as well as their Infertions, are on- 
 ly at a fmall Diflance from one another j, 
 for that Infertion, which is fixed to the infe- 
 rior Part of the Femur, anfwers the firfl 
 Head, the next to the fecond, and the third 
 to the third Head. According to thefe 
 Marks the Parts of this Mufcle mufl be di- 
 
 ilinguiilied ^ 
 
of dilJe[ih?g Bodies. 213 
 
 llinguifhed ; for a more accurate Admlniflra- 
 tion of them cannot be defcribed. 
 
 23. Obturator Internus appears af- 
 ter the former Mufcle is removed ; it is fitu- 
 ate fo deep under the ^adratus^ that we 
 could not attempt its Separation till now ; 
 when every Part befides is removed this is 
 left behind alone, and therefore it would be 
 to no Purpofe here to infill: upon its Sepa- 
 ration. 
 
 CHAR XIL 
 
 Of the Mufcles placed upon the 
 Tibia. 
 
 1. f^Afterocnemii. 
 
 2. ^^ Plant aris, 
 
 3. Soleus, 
 
 4. PopUteus. 
 
 5. Peronceus Biceps, 
 
 6. Exlenfor Lo?igus. 
 
 7. Peronaus Flexor, 
 
 8. Extenfor Pollicis, 
 
 9. Tibialis Anticiis. 
 
 10. Flexor Digitorwn 
 
 Longus. 
 
 1 1 . Tibialis P opticus.. 
 
 12. Flexor Pollicis, 
 
 P3 
 
 0% 
 
a 14 The Method 
 
 On the poflerior Part of the Leg are plac- 
 ed a great many Mufcles, as 
 
 1. Gasterocnemii, called by Riolan^ 
 GemelU, a rife by two flat Tendons from the 
 two Condyles of the Os Femoris, and run 
 down over the Soleus and Flantaris. Begin 
 their Adminiftration at the internal Side, 
 make a longitudinal Incifion in that flrong 
 Membrane, which furrounds the whole Leg, 
 then feparate it from the Soleus with your 
 Finger, which will diredl you to the Heads 
 of the Mufcles that muil be cut off. The 
 flefliy Bodies of thefe Mufcles are divided by 
 a white Line into two Parts, which being 
 difre<5led, you may feparate them. 
 
 2. Plantaris, which anfwers to the 
 Tahnarh of the Hand, is placed under the 
 former Mufcles 3 it arifes carnous and (len- 
 der from the outer Edge of the external Con- 
 dyle of the Os Femoris^ and foon after runs 
 into a long flat Tendon, which defcends along 
 the external Side of the Gajierocnemii to the 
 Os Cakis, and is there inferted into it with 
 the Tendons of the Soleus and Gajierocnemii. 
 That nervous Body, which fpreads itfelf a- 
 long the Sole of the Foot, is reckoned a Part 
 of this Mufcle ; but I could never yet fee 
 
 their 
 
of dij[eBhig Bodies. CL15 
 
 their Connexion. Having made an Incifion 
 in the Membrane above the Tendon, proceed 
 with your Operation upward till you come 
 to the Origine of this Mufcle ; then defcend 
 to the Os Calcis^ and fee whether you can 
 find its Connexion with the tendinous Ex- 
 paniion. 
 
 3 . Sol e us having a pretty large flefhy Belly, 
 arifes from the Fibula^ then goes obliquely 
 inward, and covers the Mufcle fituate on the 
 back Part of the T^ibia^ as it defcends. It 
 intermixes its Tendon with thofe of the Ga- 
 Jierocnemiij and forms what is called Chorda 
 Magna Tendo Achillis^ ^%x: Nervtis Igna'vus, 
 by Celfiis. This Mufcle may be feparated by 
 beginning at its Tendon, and fo afcending to 
 its Origine. It is inferted into the poftcrior 
 Part of the Os Calds, where you may cut it 
 off, or let it alone. 
 
 4. PoPLiTEUs, or Subpopikeus, which is 
 fituate under the Ham, from whence it has 
 its Name, appears after thefe Mufcles are re- 
 moved. It arifcs from the external Side of 
 the Femur J defcends obliquely over the Head 
 of the Perone to the Head of the Tibia, 
 where it is fometimes inferted, and fome- 
 times it goes a little farther. If you intend 
 
 P 4 ta, 
 
ai6 The M e"T hod 
 
 to raife this Mufcle, begin on that Side next 
 the Perone^ and fo afcending gradually 
 upward from the Ligament which inclofes 
 its Origine, feparate it to its Origine, which 
 you may cut off. Return now to the Muf- 
 cles fituate between the l^ibia and Fibula ; 
 where I mull inform you, that you are not 
 to exped a full Account of the Method of 
 feparating them ; this I reckon unnecefTary, 
 becaufe it is exacflly the fame with that pre-» 
 fcribed in differing the Mufcles of the Cubi- 
 tus. Therefore I will only fliew you their 
 Origine, Progrefs, and Infertion, which be- 
 ing known, you will be able of yourfelf to 
 accomplifti their Adminiftration. 
 
 5. Peron^us Biceps having a double 
 Origine from the fuperior and middle Part of 
 the Ferone^ makes its Appearance at the fu- 
 perior Part of the Fibula when denudated. 
 Its fuperior Head is fixed to the Fibula and 
 CnemodaBylitiSj and its inferior Head ap- 
 proaches the Extenfor of the Great Toe. It 
 runs down under the Malleolus Externus^ 
 palling through an annular Ligament to the 
 MetatarfuSj and is joined by one of its Ten- 
 dons to the fifth metatarfal Bone : It pailes 
 by the other Tendon under the Sole of the 
 
 Foot^ 
 
of dijfe^iing BODIES. 217 
 
 Foot, and ends under the great Toe. Riolan 
 makes this a double Mufcle, and calls it the 
 Teronaus Externus and Internus. It feems to 
 anfwer the Fundions of the Bicoris or Ra- 
 dialis Externus in the Hand, therefore might 
 properly go under that Denomination here. 
 You may feparate this Mufcle, by cutting 
 the Ligament under the Malleolus^ as you did 
 the Bicornis in the Hand. 
 
 6. Extensor Long us, or CnemodaByli- 
 ns^ fituate near the former, arifes from the 
 Head of the T^ibia^ and defcends along the 
 Side of the Tibialis Anticus upon the Foot, 
 and is inserted into the four leiler Toes. The 
 Adminiftration of this Mufcle is the fame 
 with that of the Extenfor Longus in the 
 Hand. 
 
 To this is joined in its Progrefs, and, in 
 fome Meafure, intermixed with its carnous 
 Subllance, 
 
 7. PERONiEus Flexor, fo called, but 
 not defcribed by Riolan, It arifes from the 
 Middle of the Fibula^ and paffingtalong with 
 the Tendon of the Extenfor Longus through 
 the annular Ligament, is inferted between the 
 fourth and fifth metatarfal Bone, It would 
 
 be 
 
2iS The Method 
 
 be a d'fficult Ta{k to contend how this Muf- 
 cie has been named by other Anatomifts. 
 
 Betwixt this and the following Mufcle is 
 placed 
 
 8. Extensor Pollicis, which defcends 
 from the Middle of the external Side of the 
 Tibia J with the Ex ten/or Longus, to the Toes, 
 particularly to the great Toe ; but before it 
 reaches fo far, it is divided into two Tendons, 
 which are inferted into the iirfl: and fecond 
 Phalanges of the great Toe. The Ihorteft 
 of thefe two Tendons unite with the Tendon 
 of the Pediceus. 
 
 9. Tibialis Anticus lies next to this 
 and the T^ibia^ from which it takes its Ori- 
 gine, defcends to the firft Bone of the Meta- 
 carpus, into which it is inferted, and fends off 
 a Branch to a Joint of the great Toe ; hence 
 it is that we can fcarce bend the Foot without 
 moving and extending, at the fame Time, 
 the great Toe. 
 
 Having removed \his Mufcle, you then 
 fee the Ligament which units the Tibia and 
 Fibula. On the oppofite, or interior Side, 
 behind, are placed the three following Muf- 
 cles. 
 
 10. Flexor 
 
of dij[e£iing BODIES, 219 
 
 10. Flexor Digitorum Longus, or 
 FerodaByUtis, is the firft which is to be raifed. 
 It arifes from the inner and fuperior Part of 
 the Fibula, pafles over, in its Defcent, the 
 T^ibialis Pojiicus near the Foot, and turns off 
 by the Malleolus Internum to the Majfa Carnea^ 
 with which it joins its Tendons. 
 
 11. Tibialis Posticus is the fecond, 
 which, like the Anticus^ adheres ufually to 
 the Tibia, it alfo palTes under the Malleolus to 
 the Cavity of the Foot, and firft reaches the 
 Os Naviculare, then the Os Cubiforme^ with 
 which it is joined. 
 
 12. Flexor Pollicis is the third ; it 
 arifes from the Fibula, paiTes under the Mal- 
 leolus Internus to the great Toe, where its 
 Tendon is alfo united with the Offa Sefamoi- 
 dea. If thefe three Mufcles are to be dif- 
 fered, cut firft the Ligament which unites 
 their Tendons under the Malleolus, then fepa- 
 rate their Origines thus far ; but do not pro- 
 ceed farther till you have raifed the Mufcles 
 placed upon the Foot, which I am now go- 
 ing to defcribe. 
 
 CHAP, 
 
2.20 The Me t h o d 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Of the Mufcles placed upon the 
 Foot. 
 
 1. T^Xtenfor Brevis, y. AhduBor Minimi 
 
 2. "^ Inter ojfeiExterni Digit i. 
 
 3. Flexor Br evis. 8. AhdiiElor Pollicis, 
 
 4. Maffa Came a. 9. Trarijhjerfalis. 
 
 ^. Ltimbricales, 10. Biterqffei Interni; 
 
 6. Flexor Pollicis. 
 
 1. Extensor Brevis, or Pedi^us, which 
 arifes from the A/iragalus^ and fends Tendons 
 to all the Toes except the little one, is the 
 firfl Mufcle that appears on the Back of the 
 Foot. Separate this Mufcle iirffc with the 
 Point of the Knife from the Bones of the 
 TarfuSj then from the Afiragalm^ and laftly, 
 its Tendons from the Bones of the Metatar- 
 
 fus^ that you may fee its Connedion with 
 the Toes. 
 
 2. In TE ROSS EI Extern I are likewife 
 fituate on the Back-fide of the Foot, which 
 
 mull 
 
of diJJ'eSling BODIES. cci 
 
 mufl be feparated at the fame Time with 
 the Interojj'ei Interni. 
 
 Under the Sole of the 'Foot are a great 
 many Mufcles ; therefore turn the Foot, and 
 firfl ieparate carefully the tendinous Expan- 
 fion of the Flantaris with the Fat, becaufe 
 this Tendon adheres very clofely to the Flex^ 
 or Brevis, confequently very hard to be fe- 
 parated from it : However, do not let the 
 Difficulty of this Operation deter you, but 
 rather take Courage in Hopes of bringing your 
 Anatomy, thus far carried on fuccefsfully, 
 to a happy Conclulion. Firfl feparate this 
 Tendon from the firft Phalanges of the Toes ; 
 you will then come at this Mufcle, by cut- 
 ting gradually the carnous Fibres with the 
 Point of the Knife from this extended Mem- 
 brane, till you come to the Os Calcis. 
 
 3. Flexor Br e vis is next to be feparat- 
 ed from the AbduBor^ and cut off from the 
 Calcaneum^ that you may fee the Tendons of 
 thofe Mufcles, which enter the Foot under 
 it. Then feparate the fame Extenfor from 
 the AhduBor of the Little-finger, and free it 
 from the fubjacent Mafj'a Carnea^ to find the 
 Infertions of the Tendons in the fecond Pha- 
 lanx of the Toes. I have fometimes ob- 
 
 ferved 
 
222 The Method 
 
 ferved that it fent Tendons only to three of 
 the Toes, and pafTed by the httle one, which 
 I imagine is owing to the Coalefcence of 
 the fecond and third Phalanges of the little 
 Toe into one, which fometimes happens, as 
 is commonly obferved in dead Bodies. 
 
 4. Mass A Carnea is now to be feparated 
 under the Tarfus, by beginning at that Side 
 next the great Toe. You may obferve, a§ 
 you proceed, its firm Connedion with the 
 Tendons of the Flexor Longus. 
 
 5. Lumbricales, of which there are 
 only three, becaufe the fourth Toe has no 
 fuch ufcle belonging to it, feem here to 
 take their Rife. You are to feparate the 
 Majfa Carnea J the Tendons of the Flexor 
 Longiis and the Lumbricalis together from the 
 fubjacent Flefh, becaufe they are fo firmly 
 united as not to be divided till taken ofi^. Ob- 
 ferve that the Tendons of the Flexor Longus 
 perforate the" Tendons of the Flexor Brevis^ 
 as the Siiblimis do the Proftmdus in the 
 Hand. 
 
 6. Flexor Pollicis may now beraifed 
 to the Place of its Infertion. 
 
 7. Abductor Minimi Digtti, feems 
 to be either a double, or a double-headed 
 
 Mufcle; 
 
of differing BODIES. C123 
 
 Mufcle ; for it has one Beginning from the 
 fifth Bone of the Metatarfus^ and another 
 from the Os Calcaneum. This Mufcle mufl 
 be feparated from the Bone in the fame Man- 
 ner as you did the Uke Mufcle in the Hand. 
 
 8. Abductor Pollicis performs the 
 fame Fundions, and is, in all Refpeds, like 
 the Ahdu5ior of the Thumb. 
 
 In the Cavity of the Foot there is ilill ano- 
 ther Majja Carnea, which, adhering to the 
 great Toe, is fuppofed to pull it to the other 
 Toes. Under the Bones of the Tarfus lies a 
 broad thin Aponeurojis, which remove with 
 the Knife, and then you will fee the Oiigine 
 of this Majfa Camea^ by tracing which you 
 will come to its Infertion ; but take Care you 
 do not raife along with it the Uranfoerfalu ly- 
 ing under the Roots of the Toes, and eafily 
 difcovered by its tranfverfe Fibres. But to 
 prevent fuch a Millake, feparate firft the 
 
 9. Transversal IS, and then the MafJ'd 
 Carnea. 
 
 10. Interossei Interni, being the 
 laft, are more protuberant than the Extemi^ 
 and are feparated after the fame Manner with 
 thofe under the fame Name in the Hand, to 
 the Defcription of v/hich I refer you. 
 
 We 
 
224 ^^^^ Method 
 
 We fhould here obferve laftly, the Courfe 
 of the Tendons of the Tibialis PofticuSy and 
 the Feroncem Pojiicus under the Sole of the 
 Foot ; for, what happens in no other Part of 
 the Body, they decuffate one another ; one, 
 entring the Foot under the great Toe, march- 
 es to the little Toe, while the other, being 
 nearer to the Bones, enters the Foot under 
 the little Toe, and runs to the great Toe. 
 
 BOOK 
 
()f dijfeSihg BoDlES. 225 
 
 BOOK V. 
 
 Of the Method of making a 
 Skeleton. 
 
 The PREFACE^ 
 
 'ITHOUT a previous Knowledge 
 of Ofteology, a Perfon, according 
 to Hippocrates y Galen j and Riolan, 
 mufl have but a very obfcure Idea of the 
 Origine and Infertion of the Mufcles, the 
 Adhefion of the Parts^ the immediate Inte- 
 guments of the Bones^ or of any other 
 Branch in Anatomy. 
 
 Q^ AMaix 
 
226 The Method 
 
 A Man, with the greateft Diligence^ can 
 never become a complete Anatomift, by 
 merely converling with Books j ocular In-- 
 fpedion is therefore abfolutely neceflary, in 
 order to fix in his Mind the particular Figure 
 and Shape of the human Bones : But, be- 
 caufe we cannot have always Accefs to view 
 frefh Bones, and are apt to forget Things if 
 we have them not continually before us ; 
 to fupply this Defed, we have contri- 
 ved a Method of making Skeletons, or 
 uniting dry human Bones almoft in their 
 proper Places, and preferving them when 
 thus articulated, that fo, by often infped:ing 
 them, we not only retain what was likely to 
 efcape our Memory, but rivet a deeper Im- 
 preffion thereof. And this feems to be of as 
 old a Date as any Operation in Phyfick • for 
 Gahij fay the Antients, ufed to prepare 
 Bones, and unite them by proper Liga- 
 ments. 
 
 In our Age Arts have been (o well improv- 
 ed that they are almofl brought to Perfedion 5 
 that of preparing Bones, and making Skele- 
 tons, has not been negledied, and fuch Pro- 
 grefs has been made therein^ that my Mafter 
 
of dijfeBlng Bodies. 227 
 
 D. Simon PaulU has hit on a Method of mak- 
 ing the Bones as white as the finefi; Ivory. 
 
 That the Art of building Skeletons, which 
 is fo necelTary a Branch in Phyiick, may be 
 well underflood ; I have, in Imitation of 
 Riolan^ who added to his Anatomy a con- 
 cife OJJikgium^ annex'd a fhort and eafy Me- 
 thod to this prad;ical Compendium of Ana- 
 tomy, 
 
 I have already mentioned, if there is a Va- 
 riety of Subjects to be had, that a proper 
 Choice thereof fhould be made in Anatomi- 
 cal Diffedions, The fame ought to be ob- 
 ferved as to the Bones, for thofe are only fit 
 for a Skeleton whofe Fibres firmly cohere 
 with each other ^ but Columbus is of a con- 
 trary Opinion, and thinks^ that a young, 
 fhort Body, not lufly, is the fittefl for 
 this Purpofe ; however, I cannot help alTum- 
 ing the Boldnefs to tell him, that thefe 
 Bones are lefs durable, and more iiabie to 
 Corruption, ihan the Bones of an Adult, 
 We indeed often fee Infant Skeletons in Ana- 
 tomical Theatres and the Repolitories of Ana- 
 tomifts I but thefe ferve more for Ornament 
 than real Ufe, and are made up in a quite dif- 
 ferent Manner to adult Skeletons^ which I 
 Q^ z have 
 
2,2 8 The Method 
 
 have alfo fubjoined to this by Way of Ap- 
 pendix. 
 
 Two different Operations are required in 
 fitting up a Skeleton, viz» One for cleaning 
 the Bones, and another for uniting them when 
 cleaned, which are the chief Subjed: of this 
 Book. 
 
 CHAP. L 
 
 Of the Method of cleaning the 
 Bones. 
 
 TO clean the Bones of their Impuri- 
 ties, requires feveral Operations. 
 I . The Bones mull be feparated into 
 proper Divifions, becaufe you will not ealily 
 find a Copper large enough to receive the whole 
 Body. 2. The Bones contain a medullary Oil, 
 which mufl be extradled, otherwife it en- 
 ters their Subftance, fpoils them of their 
 Beauty, makes them appear of a yellowifh 
 Colour, and attrads a large Quantity of 
 
 Duft, 
 
of dijJeSihig BODIES. 229 
 
 Dufl-, both externally and internally. 3. They 
 muft be fteeped in Water to extradl the Blood. 
 4. Boiled, to clear them of their Flefh and 
 Ligaments. And, 5. Cleaned. Each of 
 which fhall be fully explained in this Chap- 
 ter. 
 
 The Separation aj^d Divtjion of the 
 Bones. 
 
 I. The Bones are to be feparated and di- 
 vided into the Trunk and Extremities. Tie 
 the Extremities, and put them into the Boil- 
 er, but they mufl be perforated to let out 
 the Fat ; therefore they mufl be firfl: feparated 
 from one another. Begin with the Hume- 
 rus^ and feparate it from the Cervix Scapu- 
 la, by cutting the Ligaments that unite 
 them. Afterwards feparate the Humerus from 
 the Cubitus and Radius, by beginning at the 
 Radius, and cutting the Ligament which ar- 
 ticulates it with the Humerus, and furrounds 
 its round Protuberance > then bend the Hu~ 
 merus and Radius Sidewife as if folded 3 by 
 this Means the Radius will fink into the Place 
 where the former Secftion was made, and 
 give Room for carrying the Sedion farther. 
 
%^o The Method 
 
 You may cut off the Hand after the fame 
 Manner. Find the external Part where the 
 Carpus and Radius join, by bending the Hand 
 once or twice ; in that Place cut the Liga- 
 ment crofs, by beginning with the Hand at 
 the Cubitus^ and bringing your Knife towards 
 the Thumb ; thus you will come at the inte- 
 rior Region of the Carpus ^ v/hich you are 
 there to cut, and take away the Hand. The 
 Cubitus and Radius are feparated from each 
 other, by bringing the Knife betwixt them, 
 from one Extremity to the other. 
 
 The inferior Extremities, like the fuperi- 
 or, muO: be divided into three Parts. Bend 
 the Femur backward and forv/ard, and cut 
 the Ligament arifing from the Edge of the 
 Acetabulim^ and furrounding the Neck of the 
 Femur ^ then cut the fhort round Ligament, 
 which takes its Origine from the Bottom of 
 the Acetabulum^ and is inferted into the round 
 Head of the Femur ^ and any other Part that 
 hinders you from feparating this Bone. 
 
 Afterwards cut off the T^ibia^ by feparat- 
 ing the Patella from the Femur, then begin 
 with either of the lateral Ligaments, next 
 with the Middle, lailly with the other late- 
 ral one and Membranes, There is an inter-: 
 
 vening 
 
of di[feBh/g Bodies. 231 
 
 vening Cartilage, which Columbus and W, 
 Fabriciiis kept feparate j but it may be left 
 with the Tibia. 
 
 To feparate the Foot, you are to extend 
 it as far as poffible, and cut the anterior Li- 
 gament at the Joint -y then put the Knife un- 
 der the external, and continue the Se(!lion 
 till the Foot hang down on the oppofite 
 Side 5 what remains may be performed with- 
 out any Inflrudion. The Fibula may be fe- 
 parated from the Tibia, by making a longi- 
 tudinal Incifion in the Extremity, and a 
 fomewhat curvated one in the fuperior, be- 
 caufe the Fibula is joined obliquely to the 
 Tibia in the upper Part by Syjichondrojis. 
 
 The Trunk is generally divided into five 
 Parts, but three are fufficient. The firft 
 is the Head, which (after having removed 
 all the Mufcles) bend forward, and cut the 
 Membrane reaching from it to the Neck, 
 then incline the Head to either Side, and be^ 
 hind the Mailoide Proceffes fearch for the 
 Articulation, and cut it. The fame Opera- 
 tion is to be performed on the other Side» 
 You muft take Care not to break or cut the 
 Styloide ProcefTes. Some begin the Sedlion, 
 which is done with lefs Trouble, between 
 0^4 the 
 
2,32 The Method 
 
 the fecond and third Vertebrce, or they put the 
 Vertebra of the Neck into the Copper by 
 themfelves^ I chufe rather to leave them join- 
 ed with the Hhorax. Some feparate the Ribs 
 from the Vertebrce^ then tie them together, and 
 afterwards put them into the Boiler; but 
 this takes up too much Time, and is of no 
 Service, becaufe they will feparate in boiling ; 
 belides, their Extremities are liable to be broke. 
 
 The fecond Part is the Neck and Thorax, 
 which muft be feparated from the Lumbar 
 Vertebra, by making an Incifion through 
 the Cartilage, joining the lafl Vertebra of the 
 'Ihcrax with the firft of the Loins, and the 
 fpinal Marrow. Next, invert the Body, and 
 cut the Ligament which unites the Spines of 
 both Vertebra 3 afterwards extend and bend 
 the Trunk to either Side, and carefully fe- 
 parate the tranfverfe ProceiTes, becaufe they 
 are, as it were, articulated to each other, 
 and if violently disjointed, liable to be broke. 
 
 The fuperior Vertebra enters the Sinus of ■ 
 the inferior, and when the Mufcies of the 
 Loins are removed, the Place where the Dif- 
 fedion is to be made will eafily iliow itfelf. 
 
 n. T:he 
 
of dijfe[ihig Bodies. 233 
 
 11. The Extrdlmi of the Medul- 
 lary Substance. 
 
 2. When the Bones are feparated fron^ 
 each other, the Marrow is only to be ex- 
 traded out of the large cylindrical ones, 'viz, 
 the Jiumerus, Radius, and JJlna ; the Femur ^ 
 Tibia, and Fibula. To thefe fome add the 
 Cla'vicula, the Metacarpal, and the Me^ 
 tatarfal Bones, with thofe of the Fingers and 
 Toes ', out of which the Moderns extrad no 
 Marrow. 
 
 To perform this Operation, you mull 
 have two Sorts of Inftruments, viz. Per- 
 forators and Pins. 
 
 The Perforators muft be of different Sizes, 
 for the greater and fmaller Bones ; the Shape 
 of them may be feen in Figure 5. I 
 have there only delineated the Inftrument 
 without the Handle, becaufe every one may 
 have it made according to his Fancy ; and It 
 is no great Matter of what Form it is, pro- 
 vided it be fitted for the Hand of the Ope- 
 rator. The Pins fhould be round, and made 
 of Iron or Wood ; if of Wood, they muft 
 be armed with Steel Points. Their Magni- 
 tude 
 
2.34 "^^'^^ Method 
 
 tude muft be in Proportion to the Perfora- 
 tors, on account they pafs through the fame 
 Holes made h^ the Perforators. It will like- 
 vi^ife be proper to ufe fuch an Inflrument as 
 Gunfmiths have for cleaning Gun-barrels ^ 
 but becaufe its Shape differs a litde from 
 theirs, I have given a Reprefentation of it in 
 Figure 6. 
 
 Having furnilhed yourfelves w^ith thefe In- 
 ftruments, you are next to perforate the 
 Bones 3 but the Ligaments muft firft be re- 
 moved, becaufe the Point of the Perforator 
 will be very much blunted, if fuffered to 
 pafs through them before it touches the 
 Bones. You are alfo to perforate the Bone 
 in fuch a Place as is moft convenient for ex- 
 trading the Marrow, and preferving the 
 Beauty of the Skeleton y for the right per- 
 forming of which, I offer the following Di- 
 redlions. 
 
 The Vertex of the Head of the Hum ems 
 mufl be fo perforated, as that the Hole be 
 in a flreight Line with the Cavity of the 
 Bone. In the inferior Extremity it is to be 
 perforated in the Hind -part, where there is a 
 Kind of a fuperiicial Cavity for receiving the 
 Ancon. The Hole is to be made after the 
 
 Peri^ 
 
of dl[fe^lng Bodies. 235 
 
 feriofieum is removed ; but this Perforation 
 is attended with Difficulty. 
 
 The Cubitus^ or Olecranon, is to be per- 
 forated in its fuperior Part, and in the infe- 
 rior Part about the Styloide Procefs, where 
 it iinks a little, and from whence a Ligament 
 takes its Originej whjch muft be removed 
 before the Perforation is attempted. The 
 Radius muft be perforated in the Middle of 
 its fuperior and inferior Epiphyfes. 
 
 Before you fet about to perforate the 
 Head of the Femur ^ you muft firft clean the 
 Cavity adjoining the T^rochanter Major ^ 
 wherein the Tendons of the ^adrigemini 
 are inferted, and then apply your Perforator, 
 The lower Extremity of this Bone is to "be 
 perforated in the Middle of that Binus ber 
 tween the Protuberances. 
 
 As for the TUbia^ the round Ligament 
 which connedis it with the Femur muft firft 
 be removed, and then you are to perforate 
 it in that Place above, and diredly oppofite 
 below. 
 
 The Fibula rnuft be perforated above, iri 
 the Place where it joins the Tibia^ and is 
 fmooth by the Cartilage covering it ; an4 
 l^eloW;, in that Cayity belonging to the Mah 
 
 leolus 
 
%^6 The Method 
 
 leolus Eicfernus, the Ligaments and Mem- 
 branes being removed. 
 
 Having perforated the Bones, the Marrow 
 is next to be extracted. To do which, take 
 one of your Iron or Wooden Pins, and in- 
 troduce it into either of the Holes of the 
 Bone made by the Perforator, then pufh it 
 backwards and forwards, till the Marrow is 
 thruft out at the oppolite Hole. Lay afide 
 the Pin, and then take hold of a Radula of 
 a Thicknefs in Proportion to the cylindrical 
 Cavity of the Bone, prefs the Sides of it to- 
 gether with your Fingers, and introduce it 
 into the Bone. This Inftrument, when the 
 PrefTure is removed, will fcrape off the re- 
 maining Marrow from the Sides of the Bones, 
 which is to be thrufl out by another Appli- 
 cation of the Pin. You muft like wife ufe 
 internally a flrong crooked Iron Wire, to 
 break the fpongy and cellular Subftance of 
 the Bone, and thruil it out with the Mar- 
 row. . ' 
 
 The Marrow, after extracfled, fhould not 
 be thrown away, but carefully put up in a 
 Glafs, and fet in a warm Place to melt, till the 
 Dregs fubfide, and the clear Part afterward 
 to be poured off. 
 
 Hilandui 
 
of dlje^ilng Bodies. 2,3^ 
 
 Hilandus afcribes many Ufes to this Mar- 
 row. 
 
 III. The Bones are to be Jieeped in 
 Water. 
 
 3. The Marrow being extraded, the Bones 
 are next to be fteeped in Water, to fuck out 
 the Blood, and draw off the adhering Flefhj 
 for if the Bones are boiled before they have 
 lain fome Time in Water, they will ever after 
 be of a yellow, or an afhy Colour, Hence I 
 am apt to think, that if the Bones were laid in 
 fome particular Liquors, they might be 
 brought to an Ivory Colour s but more of 
 this hereafter. 
 
 Therefore lay the Bones about five or fix: 
 Inches deep under Water for three or four 
 Days, or till the Flefli turns white, and the 
 Water iofes its Tincture, and change it once 
 or twice a Day. In Winter it is more difficult 
 to extrad the Blood than in Summer j the 
 Bones therefore at fuch a Time fhould be kept 
 in a warm Place, or fleept in warm Water. 
 
 The 
 
238 The Method 
 
 The boiling of f he Bon E s. 
 
 4. We now coiiie to treat of the Manner 
 of boiling the Bones -, but they mufl not all 
 undergo that Operation, for the Sternum^ 
 will not fuffer it, becaufe cartilaginous. 
 Some are of Opinion, that the Sternum is 
 only to be macerated in Water, and after- 
 wards dried in the Sun. Riolan is againft 
 boiling the Os Hyoides and Os Coccygis, but 
 upon what Account I know not ; for the 
 latter fuffers no Detriment by boiling ; and as 
 to the former, it has no proper Place of Con- 
 nediion with the Skeleton, therefore ought 
 not to be joined to it j yet this is no Reafon 
 that thefe Bones, if they are to be cleaned,^ 
 fhould not be fomewhat boiled. 
 
 In boiling the Bones feveral Particulars are 
 to be obferved. 
 
 Riolan advifes to ptit the Bones Jirfi into 
 boiling Water ; for by that Means he thinks 
 the Operation will be fooner over» And G?- 
 Jumbiis fuppofeSj beiides other Advantages^ 
 that they will be much whiter than if they 
 had been put in cold Water, 2, The Bones 
 mull be put a confiderable Depth under 
 
of differing BODIES. 239 
 
 Water, becaufe they are often tofTed up and 
 down by the boiling Water, and frequently 
 fwim on its Surface 3 therefore they fhould 
 be kept down with a Skimmer, or fuch like 
 Inftrument, to prevent their Colour being 
 fpoiled with the Smoak. 3. The Bones of 
 the Hands and Feet fhould be feparately tied 
 in a Piece of Cloth before thrown into the 
 Kettle, otherwife their Articulations will be 
 difunited, on account the Ligaments fe- 
 parate from the Bones in Time of boiling. 
 
 4. The Water is to be fkimmed clean of 
 its Naftinefs, that the Bones may be white. 
 
 5. The Bones and Flefh, while boiling, mufl 
 be cleaned of their P'at, and due Care mufl: 
 be taken, that it do not return to the Bones ; 
 therefore it fhould be taken off with a Skim- 
 mer. 6. As to the fixed Time of boiling 
 we cannot determine, becaufe that depends 
 intirely on the Nature of the Bones. Some 
 think four or five Hours are enough ; others 
 reafon more juflly, and fay, let them boil till 
 the Flefli falls off: Wherefore, if the Sub- 
 jed: has been more than 2 z Years old, after 
 the Bones have boiled for four or five Hours, 
 lay hold, with a Flefh-hook, of one of the 
 large Bones, and fee whether it is fully boil- 
 
 ed; 
 
240 The M E T H 6 B 
 
 ed ; if it is, ydu may go about cleaning 
 them ; if not, put it in again. As to the 
 Time of boilings it may be held a general 
 Rule, that young Bones boil fooner than a- 
 dult ones. This even the common Cooks 
 are apprifed of, becaufe they daily find that 
 old Meat takes a longer Tinle in boiling than 
 young. Young Bones, when too long boiled^ 
 grow exceeding tender, porous, and liable to 
 break in Time of cleaning 5 This I am fuffi- 
 ciently convinced of frorri Experience.' The 
 Feet and Hands mufl boil longeft, that the 
 Marrow (of which they contain a great Quan- 
 tity) may have Time to evaporate through 
 the Bones, 
 
 I mentioned that the Sternum fhould be 
 macerated in Water, and not boiled , when 
 it has therefore lain in Water for three or four 
 Days, it fliould be taken out and cleanedj 
 without any previous boiling. 
 
 Some, however, put it into boiling Water 
 for a Minute or two, that the Membranes 
 may be more eafily extirpated 5 but Vefnlim 
 will not fo much as fuffer it to be fprinkled 
 with hot Water, and I think he is in the 
 right ; for it is of bad Confequcnce to flrip 
 the Cartilages of all their Membranes,^ be- 
 
of cUjJeSiing BODIES. 241 
 baufe they are then apt to fplit, and when 
 joined with Brafs Wire, gready disfigure the 
 Skeleton, nor can there be a greater Mark 
 of Deformity in a Skeleton, though every 
 other Way neatly conneded, than a bad pre- 
 pared Os PeBoris, with its Cartilages. Sup- 
 pofe the Cartilages are to be denudated, yet 
 this may be done without boiling. There- 
 fore I thus free only the Os FeBoris of its 
 Membranes, and not the Cartilages ; Having 
 made a tranfverfe Sedlion in the fuperior Part 
 of the Sternum^ I cut all its Coats to the 
 Bone, and fcrape off as much of tbenifrom 
 the Bone as I can take hold of with my 
 Hand ; this I fo ftretch as if I were to tear 
 it afunder, that the intervening Fibres clofely 
 adhering to the Bone may appear ^ which, 
 partly by Jcraping, and partly by gently cut- 
 ting, I clear the Bones of, till I come to thd 
 Cartilage Xiphoides^ that, like other Cartila- 
 ges, muft be foftly treated. I afterwards re- 
 peat the fame Operation on the oppolite 
 Side. , ■ . 
 
 When the Bone is ftripped of its Mem- 
 branes^ cut off the Cartilages covering the 
 glenoide Cavity that receives the depreffed 
 Mead of the Clavicle j afterwards clean the 
 R Carti- 
 
1^2 The Method 
 
 Cartilages belonging to the Ribs of tbek 
 Flefh and Fat with the Knife. 
 
 This cannot be conveniently taught by 
 Words ; but it mufl ferve for the prefent to 
 advertife you to begin near the Sternim, and 
 not to cut or break in the leaft the Liga- 
 ments that unite the Cartilages and Sternum. 
 
 While the Cartilages are drying, they are 
 apt to be contraded and diftorted ; therefore 
 fome proper Method mufl be fallen upon to 
 make them keep their proper Diftance and 
 Situation. 
 
 We mufl: get two Pins a little crooked,, 
 and fix one of them in the End of each Car- 
 tilage, and fallen them at fuch a Diflance as 
 the Ends of the Cartilages ufe to be from one 
 another in the Body^ but becaufe their Di- 
 ftance will decreafe by Degrees, after it has 
 been fpread a Day or two, you mufl: extend 
 it with a Cord, lefl it fhould change its pro- 
 per Situation. Hang up the Sternum to dry 
 in a cold fliady Place *. 
 
 * Vefalius orders the Sternum to be laid in a molft Place^ 
 left the Cartilages fhould be divided before they are connefied 
 with the Ribs ; but if their Connection be too long defeired, 
 it will be no Hindrance if the Ster-num be dried ; for whea 
 you are to join it, dip it in W'ater, and it will come to its 
 natural Pcfitioa j and when foftened, faften it to the Ribs. 
 
 v.o/ 
 
of dtjj'e^itng Bodies. 245 
 
 V. OJ c leaning the B o N E s. 
 
 We now come to the cleaning of the 
 Bones, upon which it would be trifling to 
 fpend many Words, fince this Exercife dif- 
 charges the Office of a" Preceptor, and every- 
 one that can cut his Viduals, knows how to 
 take the Flefli off from a Bone ; wherefore 
 I will fay no more upon this Sabje6t, but 
 only put you in Mind to be careful when 
 you come to the Epiphyfes^ becaufe their Sub- 
 fiance is tender, and may be ealily broke, if 
 you apply a Knife to them with any confide- 
 rable Force. You muil alfo obferve to wipe 
 the Bones gently with a clean rough Towel ; 
 for lliould you rub them roughly, efpecially 
 the Vertebrce, Ribs, Os Sacrum, or their Pro- 
 celTes, you may hurt them fooner than you 
 are aware of. But every Part which does not 
 belong to the Subflance of the Bones is to be 
 taken away, as Flefh, Membranes, Liga- 
 ments, and Cartilages*. We fhould take 
 
 particular 
 
 * Hence it happens that I do not underftand Riolan, who'» 
 among thefe Parts which are demonfi:rated after the Bones 
 are well prepared, roentions, in the third Place, the cartila- 
 ginous Incruftation of the Bones, and the Cover of the Mem- 
 R % brane 
 
244 ^^^^ Method 
 
 particular Care in cleaning the Claviculce and 
 Os Sacrnmj bec^ufe they are very unequal y 
 befideSj the 0; Sacrum is crooked, contains 
 the End of the fpinal Marrow, and fends 
 out through its anterior and poflerior Forami- 
 7ja feveral Nerves. This Bone fliould be 
 cleaned on the Outfide, then the Nerves 
 fhould be thrufl: back with an Iron Pin by 
 their Foramina into the great Cavity, and af- 
 terward extraded with a Hook put in at 
 that Foramen through which the fpinal Mar- 
 row defcends, or they may be pufhed down- 
 wards, and extracted at the lower Foramen. 
 
 To clean the Head is a very difficult Tafk, 
 on account of its Bafis havino; feveral Protu- 
 berances and FrocefTes, which meeting toge- 
 ther form a great many Cavities and Forami- 
 na, and thefe are filled with Fleih and Mem- 
 
 brane of the Periojleum ; for in preparing the Bones we re- 
 move the Cartilages, which, in Time of boiling, are torn 
 and rent. It is impoffible to preferve the Periojfeum ; for it 
 feparates of itillf from the largeft Bones, therefore needs 
 not be differed. I cannot well relifh the Advice of Colum- 
 bus, who defires us to cake Care, while the Bones are boil- 
 ing, that no Injury be done to the Proce/Tes and Cartilages 
 covering their Extremities, and to fee that none of the o- 
 ther moveable Cartilages be loll. This Admonition, I 
 think, is trifling ; becaufe they ought to be viewed and de- 
 monftrated before their Bones are committed to the Boiler, 
 according to his own Way of thinking. 
 
 branes_, 
 
of dijJeSih/g Bodies. 245 
 
 branes, which clofely adhere to them : Their 
 numerous Foramina increafe the Difficulty, 
 becaufe they pafs the Cranium fometimes in 
 a freight, and fometimes in an oWique Di- 
 rection. To clean the Head therefore it re- 
 quires a good Ofleologift^ with a careful 
 and experienced Hand 3 a particular Re- 
 gard mufl likewife be had to the Styloide 
 and Pterygoide Proceffes, becaufe they are 
 very llender: The Styloide are fometimes 
 joined to the Head by an intei-vening Carti- 
 lage, and therefore eafily feparated j if you 
 iind them fhake, cut them off, and lay them 
 afide, till you have an Opportunity of re-unit- 
 ing them. To clean thefe minute Cavities, 
 you mufl: have a Pair of Forceps with long 
 llender Points, for taking hold of and ex- 
 trading the Membranes. This Inftrument 
 will ferve to clean the Meatus Auditorius, 
 and the other Foramina that will not admit 
 of the Pin. As for fuch as will receive the 
 Pin, they may be cleaned with it, or with 
 the Point of a Knife. While this is doino-, 
 endeavour to extrad the OJicula Auditus out 
 of the Meatus Auditorius, which you may 
 hang at the mammillary Procefs, or keep 
 them fome other Way. In cleaning the 
 ^ 3 Bone^ 
 
246 The M E. T H o D 
 
 Bones the folio wing Diredtions are to be ob- 
 ferved. There are n:iany Bones fo much like 
 one another, that even the moil: experienced 
 Anatomift is often at a Lofs to diftinguifh 
 them, and yet every one mail: have its proper 
 Place; therefore, to prevent lofing more Time 
 fearching for the Situation of the Bones than 
 would be neceffary in joining them, they 
 muft be tied with a Thread in their natural 
 Order. For Infcance, in the Hand beginning 
 at the Little-finger, tie firil: its upper Joint, 
 next the middle one, then the laft ; after- 
 wards that metacarpal Bone which lies under 
 it. 
 
 In the fame Manner proceed with the 
 Ring, Middle, and Fore-fingers, and with 
 the Thumb. This Direction will ferve for 
 the other Hand, and alfo for the Feet. 
 
 The Ribs muft alfo be tied in the. fame 
 order they fucceed one another ; alfo the 
 Vertebrce, efpecially the dorfal ones, becaufe 
 it is more difficult to diftingai£h them from 
 one another than any of the refl. 
 
 The Bones, when cleaned, are to be num- 
 bered, to fee that none are loft 3 Regard muft 
 likewife be had to the Teeth, which gene- 
 rally fall out of their Sockets while in the 
 
 Boiler, 
 
of differing Bodies. 2,4^ 
 
 Boiler, and alfo to their Lamiride^ which are 
 Parts of the temporal Bone, and adhere to 
 the Sides of the Syncipiit^ becaufe in boiling 
 they often ilide off *. 
 
 We have now ended the firfl Operation in 
 the Structure of a Skeleton ; however, fome 
 may objed, and fay, that we have taken 
 no Notice of the Manner of polifhing the 
 Bones, which they think gives them an a- 
 greeable white Colour, that very much ftrikes 
 the Fancy of the Spectator j but this is more 
 for Ornament than real Advantage, therefore 
 I omit it, tho' I could fay fomething on that 
 Subjed: : For Ufefulnefs, and not Beauty, 
 which is not minded by Anatomifts, is the 
 chief Intention of this Book. 
 
 * Vefalius advifes when you have reckoned the Bones, to 
 throw them again for a fhort Time in boiling Water, then 
 take them out, and rub them clean with a rough Towel ; af- 
 terwards fcrape off any Remainder of Ligaments, Mem- 
 branes, Origines, or Infertions of Mufcles. But this fhould 
 not be attempted in the ilender Bones for Reafons formerly 
 jmentioned. 
 
 R 4 CHAP, 
 
48 r& M E T H O B 
 
 CHAR 11. 
 
 Of the Method of articulating the. 
 Bones when cleaned. 
 
 Skeleton is not only ufeful in bring- 
 ing the young Qileologifl: to the 
 Knowledge of the Bones, but alfo to 
 Anatomical ProfefTors, when they want to 
 fhew where the Mufcles have their Origine^ 
 and Infertions. It is on this Account that 
 Bones, when joined in a particular Manner, 
 are kept by Anato mills to be made ufe of 
 on proper Occafions ; and therefore being 
 obliged to have feyeral Syflems of Bones, I 
 intend to fhew how they may be fo con- 
 ned:ed, that when the Skeleton is compleat^ 
 ed, they may be divided into as many Parts 
 as the Body will admit of, according to the 
 Rules of Ofieotomy^ and alfo to re-unite them 
 in a few Minutes. 
 
 But before you fet about the Work, fome 
 proper Inftruments qiuil be had, mz. Per- 
 ' forators. 
 
of dijJeSling BODIES. 249 
 fbrators or Piercers, the Forceps, a Pair of 
 SciiTars, and Thread. 
 
 I have delineated the common Perforators 
 according to their Bignefs, which are fome- 
 times called Needles, and fometimes Fibula. 
 Thefe fliould be of a different Magnitude, 
 in Proportion to the Bones they are to perfo- 
 rate. The Needle fhould be fhort and thick, 
 to fuftain the Re-adtion of the fmall Bones 
 without breaking ; and the Perforators long 
 and thick, becaufe defigned for perforating 
 the large Bones. 
 
 You want another Machine to turn round 
 
 the Terebra, and the moil convenient one 
 
 for that Intention is delineated in Figure 7. 
 
 When you ufe this Machine, fix its Bafe in 
 
 the Place you think moft proper, only take 
 
 Gare that the Prominence of the turning Piece 
 
 of Wood be expofed to free Air, whereby 
 
 you can, without Hindrance, apply the Bones 
 
 to the Terebra, fometimes in a ftreight, and 
 
 fqmetimes in a curved Line. Having fecur- 
 
 ed the Bafe, fix the Terebra in its own Place, 
 
 and faflen it with a crofs Pin, then drawing 
 
 the Bow backwards and forwards, you turn 
 
 round the Tlerebra, to which apply the Bonq 
 
 to be perforated. 
 
 ^^ ' The 
 
%5o The Method 
 
 The Bones being perforated, you mufl 
 have Wire for uniting them. Fabricius fays 
 the Antients ufed Fiddle-ilrings, but thefe 
 were of a fhort Duration ; he therefore fub- 
 ilituted in their Room Brafs-wire, which 
 iafi:s as long as the Bones. Iron-wire is of 
 equal Strength with Brafs-wire, but is more 
 liable to ruft, therefore the latter is prefera- 
 ble to the former -, but put it fome Time in 
 the Fire before you ufe it, to prevent its 
 turning Brittle, and breaking when twifted. 
 While in the Fire it gathers Duft, and lofes 
 its Colour, yet, if fcoured with Brick-duft 
 and Oil, you will free it of its Duft, and re- 
 cover its Colour *. Cut off with your Scif- 
 fars or Pincers, a Piece of Wire of a certain 
 Length, which put through the Holes of the 
 Bone, and with a fharp-pointed round For^ 
 ceps pull it ftrongly, and twift it fo that it 
 may not fall out, nor the Bones feparate from 
 each other. 
 
 This is the general Method of connedling 
 the Bones, and what has been faid concerning 
 this Affair, might, perhaps, be fufficient ; , 
 but I intend to be more particular, and Ihew 
 
 * Some would have the Wire boiled, to make it more 
 
 flexible. 
 
 where 
 
of di[fe£iing BODIES, 251 
 where the Bones fhould be fo perforated as 
 to conceal from the Sight the Wire as much 
 as poffible, and likewife point out the Diffe- 
 rence in joining particular Bones *. 
 
 I begin with the Extremities, and firfl 
 with the Hand, then the Foot, and laftly 
 the Trunk. 
 
 L Of articulating the Bones of the 
 Upper Extremities. 
 
 In the Hand begin at the Extremities of 
 the Fingers, and perforate twice the third 
 Joint with a Needle on the Infide near the 
 Place of Articulation, or you may fo perfo- 
 rate the Bone that both Holes may meet in 
 one, which is agreeable to the Pradice of 
 many, who make only one Hole in a Bone; 
 or as you begin with a double Perforation, 
 you may end with one ; which was Fabricl^ 
 us' Method, who twice perforated every Bone 
 of the Fingers and Metacarpus, to hinder 
 
 * Fabricius attempts foR^ething of this Kind in a Letter to 
 Pa'vius, annexed to a Treatife in High Dutch concerning the 
 Excellency and Ufefulnefs of Anatomy, wherein are a great 
 many ufeful Things, and feyeral .Defeds, which I fhall en- 
 ■deavour to fupply. 
 
 them 
 
2-52. The Method 
 
 them from turning round *. But whether 
 you make a lingle or double Perforation, the 
 fuperior Hole muil be in a ftreight Line with 
 the inferior : Therefore obferve this general 
 Rule 'j wherever the Peiforation is made, that 
 the Holes for receiving Wire muft be paral- 
 lel in the feme Bone, and diredly oppolite to 
 thofe in the correfponding one. In order to 
 this, place the Bones in the Situation they 
 are afterwards to ftand in ; if the Bone is 
 fmall, mark the Place where you intend to 
 begin the Perforation with a Needle j but if 
 this cannot be done, take them gently up 
 from one another, and fix your Eye on the 
 Place where you defign to fix the Perfora- 
 tor. This muft be the general Method with 
 all Bones of the Hands and Feet. If you 
 make in every Bone two Holes, draw through 
 both Ends of the Wire, and twift them un- 
 der the Metacarpus 'y and if you defign to 
 make only one Hole in fome Articulations of 
 the Fingers of the Metacarpal and Metatarfal 
 Bones, it muft be done with the Fibula^ be- 
 caufe the Wire muft be drawn through the 
 ^ole after doubled and twifted. You are 
 
 * This is indeed a-n excellent War, but a very laborious 
 aod difficult Q^e. 
 
 ake. 
 
of dijje^iing BODIES. 25^ 
 likewife to perforate tranfverfly twice with 
 the Needle the fuperior Extremities of the 
 Metacarpal Bones in the Prominence next the 
 Palm of the Hand, and then, drawing 
 through the Wire, unite them a little loofe- 
 ly, becaufe in live Subjects thefe Joints are 
 not clofely conneded. If you will follow 
 the Advice of fome, you may ealily join the 
 Bones of the Carpus to thofe of the Meta^ 
 carpus ', for in cleaning thefe Bones they leave 
 the Ligaments intire, that the Operator may 
 be eafed of the Trouble of colleding the 
 Bones again, and they ufe the fame Method 
 with thofe of the Foot. It is indeed a trou- 
 blefome Affair to place every one of thoie 
 Bones in their natural Situation, and fcarce 
 pradicable, except you have another Skele- 
 ton as a Pattern to go by, with relpecft to 
 their Place and Situation. It is not poffible 
 here to dire6t you by verbal Inflrud:ion, be- 
 caufe thofe Bones have no proper Names af- 
 fixed to them. However, I will, in fome 
 Meafure, endeavour to account for the Or- 
 der in which they fhould be joined, by giv- 
 ing them Names taken from their Figure. 
 
 Under the Thumb lies the Os Culiforme, 
 which, on Account of the great Inequality 
 
 of 
 
254 ^^^^ Method 
 
 of its Sides, {hould rather be denominated Os 
 TrapezoUes. Under the Fore- finger is placed 
 the Trapezium, Under the Middle-iinger 
 the Os Magnum^ fo called, becaufe it is the 
 greateil and thickeft Bone in the Carpus^ 
 having a fmall Prominence in the Hind-part. 
 Under the Ring and Little-fingers is fituate 
 the Os UndJ'ormey (6 called firom being crook- 
 ed in the Infide like a Hook. Next to this,- 
 on the Outfide, lies another fmall Bone^ 
 whofe Sides make three fmall Triangles, and 
 may be denominated Os Ciineiforme -, to it is 
 joined a fmall Bone, about the Bignefs of a 
 Pea, concave on that Side v^hich lies next the 
 former. Thefe fix Bones muft be joined in 
 the Order now mentionedj and each of them 
 twice perforated with a Needle j then draw 
 the Wire, as above direded, through the fu- 
 perior Heads of the metacarpal Bones, but 
 they mufi: be placed a little oblique and crook- 
 ed. Two Bones are yet remaining, one 
 whereof I call KoTuXosiJ^f, becaufe of its ^z- 
 niis^ which receives the fmall Head of the" 
 Os Magnum ; the otherj Os Lunaiim, becaufei 
 it has a Si?2us in Form of a Half-moon^ 
 which receives a Part of the fame Protube- 
 rance of the Os Magnum, When you have 
 
 found 
 
of dijfe^iing BopiES. 255 
 found the proper Situation of thefe Bones,, 
 perforate them with the Fibula in thofe Pla- 
 ces correfponding to the metacarpal Bones, 
 and pull the Wires already put through the 
 Fingers, then join the Thumb according to 
 the Diredlions given in articulating the Fin- 
 gers *. 
 
 The Cubitus and Radius are connedled a- 
 bove and below by the fame Operation -, only 
 with this Difference, that fuch Holes as are 
 made in the fuperior Part of the Radius^ 
 mull be made in the inferior End of the 
 Cubitus, and vice 'verfa. Therefore find out 
 the natural Situation, then you will obferve 
 almofl a third Part of the fuperior Head of 
 the Radius a little depreff ed ; about the Edges 
 of this Place fix your Needle, and make it 
 pafs through the Hole made for taking out the 
 Fat, but perforate the femilunar Sinus of the 
 Cubitus at leafl once with the Fibula. Twifl 
 now a double Wire, fo as to form a fmall Ring 
 in its fuperior Part like that in the Figure I 
 jntend to lay before you when I fpeak of the 
 
 * Some twift here the Wires, and join the Hand to the Cu- 
 hitus and Radius with other Wires. But 1 think it more 
 convenient to draw the Wires of the Thumb, Fore, and 
 Middie-iingers through the Radius, and in this Place only 
 twiil the Wires belonging to the other Fingers. 
 
 Scapula -J 
 
2^6 The M E T H B 
 
 Scapula J draw it through the Hole in x\it 
 Cubitus^ and faflen it, by twifting it round • 
 the Ring fhould be turned towards the Radius^ 
 Then draw another Wire through either of 
 the Holes of the Radius -, after having drawn? 
 it through the Ring of the fir ft Wire, put it 
 through the other Hole of the Radius ^ and 
 twift its tv/o Extremities, After the fame 
 Manner you unite the inferior Parts of thefe 
 Bones, if you underftand the fame of the Ra^ 
 dius which I have faid of the Cubitus, and 
 ^ice verj'a of the Cubitus what has been men-^ 
 tioned of the Radius. 
 
 To join the Cubitus ^ith the HufHerus^ 
 perforate its two Protuberances ; if you ob- 
 ferve a little Riling, which divides, as it were, 
 this Sinus into two Parts, make the Holes pa- 
 rallel to this Eminence, and it is no great 
 Matter if you touch its Surface j becaufe, 
 ^^tn the Bones are joined, it cannot be feen. 
 This Operation is fomcwhat difficult, on ac- 
 count the Sinus refembles a Crefcent ; there- 
 fore, according to the given Direction, thie 
 Bone fhould be perforated in that Form which 
 cannot be done, becaufe the Terebrd fnuft 
 perforate the Bones in a ftreight Line. To' 
 obviate this Difficulty, and that the Diredlion 
 
 may 
 
of dtfjeBtng Bodies, 257 
 
 may be ix)mewhat crooked, pufli the Terebnt 
 from both Extremities of the Bone, fo as 
 that the Foramina meeting togetlier may 
 tnake an obtufe Angle ; then drive the Tere- 
 bra into ahnoll half the Thicknefs of the 
 Uumerus^ a little above the 'Trochlea ; after- 
 Wards draw a Wire through this and the for- 
 mer HoleSj and twift its Ends, fo as that the 
 Cubitus may have Room enough to bend. 
 
 The Scapula iliould be joined to the Ribs, 
 before the Head of the Humerus is perforat- 
 ed J therefore perforate the middle Cavity in 
 the Neck of the Scapula^ that there rnay be a 
 PalTage to the Infide of the Bone, through 
 which a t wilted Wire may be drawn, and 
 its Ends croiTed over each other, as in Fi- 
 gure 8. 
 
 To know where the Head of the Humerus 
 Ihould be perforated^ apply the Humerus to 
 the Scapula In the fame Pofition it is natural- 
 ly fufpended, and mark the Place where the 
 Wire inferted into the Scapula touches j then 
 begin your Perforation with the Fibula, and 
 end it in that Sinus carved for theReception of 
 the fecond Tendon of the Head of the Biceps. 
 Put the Wire, which for this Articulation is 
 pretty thick, through the Ring fitted for the 
 S Cervix 
 
258 The Method 
 
 Cervix Scapulca^ and twifl: the other End in 
 a fpiral Line ; thus it will be made fit for per- 
 forming all the Motions which the Humerm 
 did in the living Body. 
 
 11. Of the Articulation of the Bones 
 ^/& Lower Extremity. 
 
 The Compofition of the Foot is almoft 
 the fame with that of the Hand, except in a 
 few Things, which I fhall mention. The 
 great Toe has the fame Conjundion with 
 the other Toes as the Thumb with the Fing- 
 ers : But in the Foot are fe'veral fefamoide 
 Bones, and thofe lying under the great Toe 
 deferve our particular Notice, becaufe they 
 are large enough to be connected with the 
 Skeleton, and are always found different from 
 the refl. In the Head of the metacarpal 
 Bone are two Smufes divided by an intervening 
 Tubercle, which, with the Ojja Sefamoidea^ 
 muil be obliquely perforated with the Nee- 
 dle, and joined by a Wire. 
 
 As to the Connexion of the Tarfal Bones, 
 the litdeToe,and the next to it are received by 
 the Os Ciiboides, which again is received by the 
 Os Cakaneum v through thefe Bones draw 
 
 Wires, 
 
of dljfeSl'tng Bodies. 259 
 
 Wires, and faflen them in that Cavity form- 
 ed by the Trains and Os Calcis^ when joined. 
 Next to the Os Ciiboides comes the Os Cunei^ 
 Jorme Medium^ lying under the great Toe, 
 then the Os Cuneiforme minus \ but fome 
 would have this Bone placed in the Middle. 
 Thefe three Bones lie in the anterior Part of 
 the Foot parallel j but the fourth, or Os Cu' 
 neiforme Majus^ is more prominent than the 
 reft. The Ojja Ciineiformia are fixed to the 
 gibbous Part of the Os Scaphoides, the Con- 
 vexity of which lies toward xhQ Talus -, in 
 this the Bones of the three Toes meet, which 
 are there to be united s but the Offa Cuneiform 
 mia and Os Cubiforme (hould be firft connect- 
 ed by a Wire drawn tranfverlly through them 
 according to the above given Direcftions in 
 the Carpus, 
 
 When you join the Aftragalus to the 0$ 
 Calcaneum^ perforate it twice in the Einus 
 made by the bending Adion of the ante- 
 rior Part of the Tibia on it, then perfo- 
 rate the Os Cakaneiim, under which twift 
 the Wires. Some perforate both Bones tranf- 
 verlly, and jdraw through the V/ire. 
 
 The Foot is joined to the Tibia and Fibu- 
 la., by perforating the Talus and both Malleoli 
 S 2 with 
 
n6o T& M E T H o D 
 
 with a pretty grofs I'erebra^ and driving' 
 through thefe Holes a fubftantial Piece of 
 Brafs Wire of the fame Thick nefs with the 
 Terebra, and which will not eafily bend, 
 then riveting it on each Side. 
 
 The Tibia is joined to the Fejniir^ by mak- 
 ing two Holes through that Foramen defigned 
 for extracting the Marrow, to reach the Sides 
 of the Bone ; one to terminate in the Place 
 where the Fibula is joined, and the other to 
 pafs through ih^Fibula: Then twifl the Wire 
 according to the Diredlion given in the Sca- 
 pula that it may form a Circle, tranfmit its 
 Extremities through the Holes in the Tibia, 
 and make one End pafs through the Fibula, 
 which will, by this Means, be connected to 
 the Tibia. 
 
 The Patella has on its Infide a protuberant 
 Line, on each Side of which make a Hok, 
 fo as that they may both meet, and form an 
 obtufe Angle ; put a Wire through both thefe 
 Holes, and twifl: it j then make another 
 Hole in the Tubercle in the Middle of the 
 Head of the Tibia, through which draw the 
 other End of the Wire. 
 
 Perforate tranfverfly with a grofs Terebra 
 the hind ProcelTes of the inferior End of the 
 
 Femur f 
 
of dijJeSih/g Bodies. '261 
 
 Femur y through which Holes, and the Wire- 
 ring inferted in the Head of the Tibia, drive a 
 pretty thick Wire, and thus thefe two Bones 
 will be united *'. When you join the Fe^ 
 mur to the Coxendix^ take Care the Holes be 
 parallel to each other, leaft the Foot fhould 
 incline too much to the Infide or Outfide, 
 Therefore apply according to the natural Si- 
 tuation the Head of the Femur to the Ace- 
 tabulum, then perforate thefe Bones with a 
 long and thick Terebra, and fecure both by 
 driving a Piece of grofs Wire through them. 
 
 Of articulatmg the CoxENDIx* 
 
 I mufl make a fhort Digreffion on account 
 of mentioning the Coxendix, therefore I fliall 
 fubjoln the Method of conneding it pofteri- 
 orly with the Os Sacrum, and anteriorly witli 
 its Fellow Bone. 
 
 This being a broad Bone, mufl be twice- 
 joined to the Os Sacrum, viz. by its firft and. 
 third Fertebra. If you have a Terebra of fuch a. 
 
 * Fahricius ufed another Method of conneding thefe two 
 Bones and the Patella, which you may fee in his Epiftle to 
 Pamus ; one Article in it is, that he prevents the Bones from 
 making Motion. Vefalius puts a Piece of Wood into the 
 Holes made for extradling the Marrow, and thus he united 
 thefe two Bones. 
 
 S: 1 Lengths 
 
=2-6a The Method 
 
 Length as will perforate the Os Sacrum, and 
 reach the 6ppofite Side of the Ck)xendix, 
 thefe two Bones may be conneded by the 
 fame Wires, which will thereby be hid. But 
 if you have not a I'erebra long enough, then 
 perforate the Bones twice above near the firft 
 Vertebra of the Os Sacrum, and twice below 
 near the third, and faflen them clofely with 
 Wires. To join it with its Fellow, make 
 two Holes in each ; begin where the Carti- 
 lage, now removed, joined the OJja Pubisy 
 then end in the interior Region, and make 
 the Holes diredly oppofite to each other. 
 Put the Ends of the Wire through the Out- 
 lide of one Bofte, and through the In fide of 
 the other, then twill them fo as that they may 
 lie intirely hid, and not loofe. The Coccyx, 
 fometimes compofed of three, and fometimes 
 of four Bones, adheres to the inferior Ver- 
 tebra of the Os Sacrum, perforate each of 
 thefe twice with a Needle, alfo the inferior 
 Vertebra of the Os Sacrum, then put the two 
 Extremities of one Wire through all the little 
 Bones of the Os Coccygis in their order, thro* 
 the Os Sacrum^ which twift afterwar<l firmly. 
 
 Of 
 
of differing BODIES. 263 
 Of articulating the VERTEBRA. 
 
 As to the Method of conneding the Ver- 
 tebra , fcarce any Thing has yet been faid ; 
 fome are fatisfied with an Iron Rod poflefling 
 the Place of the fpinal Marrow for the ar- 
 ticulating the fpinal Vertebrce. Bat this does 
 not anfwer the X^t'ii^ • becaufe the Verte- 
 br<z are fubjecft to be turned round *. Others 
 are fatisfied with drawing Wires through 
 tranfverfe Holes made in them 5 but the 
 Bodies of the Vertehrce are here covered with 
 Brafs like a Coat of mail. I therefore con- 
 trived the following Method, namely, I twice 
 perforate the Bodies of the Vertebra in Lines 
 perpendicular, and parallel to each other. 
 When I have annexed the firft Vertebra to 
 the Head, I begin with the fecond, and 
 perforate it near the Sides of the Procef- 
 fiis Dentatus with a grofs Terebra, and 
 fo proceed with the Cervical and dorfai 
 Vertebra, till I have fixed them all on the 
 fame Wire. As for the Lumbar Vertebra^ I 
 faften them to the Os Sacrum; becaufe, if 
 the Skeleton is at any Time to be taken to 
 
 * Fabncius thought to. prevent this Inconveniency, by 
 putting thin Laths rousid the Iron Rod. 
 
 S 4 Pieces, 
 
264 The Method 
 
 Pieces, it may be done with lefs Trouble 5 
 the Ends of the Wire are only to be bended 
 on account of their Strength. To join the 
 Atlas with the Head, you perforate it in the 
 pofterior Part near that Hole through which 
 the cervical Vein afcends, alfo the Ecphyfis 
 of the Occiput^ joined to the Sinus of the 
 Atlas ; draw a Wire through the Hole, and 
 the End of it through the Foramen Magnum 
 Occipitisj then twift both Ends. 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Ribs.. 
 
 The Ribs muft be faftened to the Sternwii: 
 and Fertebrce. Thefe, when cleaning, fo-me 
 Anatomifts do not feparate from the Verte- 
 brce^ but for what Reafon I know not, fince 
 they afterwards join them with Wire. If you 
 know how to articulate one, you can from 
 thence unite all the reft, for the Method is 
 the fame : And, in order to this, take the 
 firfl: of either Side, (for there you are to be- 
 gin) apply it to the Vertebra^ obferve the 
 Place where they join each other, and there 
 twice perforate the Rib with a Fibula^ then fit 
 the Rib again to the Vertebra^ and, having put 
 a Needle through the Holes of the Rib, per^ 
 
 forate 
 
of diJJeBing BODIES. ^6^ 
 
 forate the tranfverfe Proceffes, widen the 
 Bore with the Fibula, then join the Rib and 
 Vertebra with a Wire. Articulate next the 
 oppofite Rib to the oppofite Side ; afterwards 
 join the fecond Vertebra to the former, and 
 in the fame manner unite all the Ribs, the 
 third, fourth, ^c. in their Rank. 
 
 The Cartilages of the Sternum being cut 
 from the true, and fome of the falfe Ribs, 
 mufl: be rejoined, and the like Articulation 
 ferves both them and the Clavicidce with the 
 Sternim and Scapula. This may be done ei- 
 ther by drawing the Wire once or twice 
 through i the lafl coincides with the Con- 
 nedtion of the Ojfa Pubis already defcribed. 
 If you draw the Wire only once through, 
 make one Hole in the Rib, and another pa- 
 rallel in the Cartilage, thea twifl the Wire, 
 when drawn through, in the Infide of the 
 I'horax. Let not the Sternum be too dry be- 
 fore joined ; if it is, dip it in. Water till it 
 re-afiiimes its former Shape j but ftraiten the 
 Wire gradually as it dries ; it would be of 
 Service to ufe the Sticks already mentioned. 
 
 To make the Ribs keep their due Di- 
 |lance, their Sid^s mufl be united with a 
 
 Wire. 
 
%66 The Method 
 
 Wire. Therefore, before you fix the firfl 
 Rib to the Skeleton, perforate it with a Te- 
 rebra about two Inches from the Sternum^ 
 draw a Wire through the Hole, and twift it 
 the Diftance between the firfl and fecond 
 Rib, then put the Wire round the fecond 
 Rib, twifi: it again, and apply it in the fame 
 Manner to the third Rib, and thus proceed till 
 you come to the twelfth or lafi: Rib, which 
 rauft alfo be perforated, afterwards draw the, 
 Extremities of the Wire through the Hole, 
 and twifl them over each other, for fecuring 
 the whole qf your Work as to the Ribs. 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Scapula 
 ^WClavicula, 
 
 To unite the Scapula in its proper Situa- 
 tion with the Ribs, mark on both Sides, 
 by a fmall Line, the Place of the fecond, 
 fourth and fixth Vertebrae ^ afterwards perfo- 
 rate it with the H^2^Z?. Firft join the C//^- 
 'Dicula to the Sternum^ then annex it to the 
 Scapula^ which at laft unite to the Vertebne» 
 
 Of 
 
of dijjeciing Bodies. 'idy 
 
 Of the Articulation of the Head. 
 
 The Head is only to be laid above the Ske- 
 leton ; in order to this, make a Hole about 
 4 of an Inch Diameter in the Vertex, diredlly 
 oppofite to the Foramen Magnum of the Oc- 
 ciput for the Iron Rod which fupports the 
 Skeleton to pafs through. The fuperior Part, 
 which was fawed afunder from the inferior 
 Part of the Skull, when opened, mufl be 
 rejoined ; therefore make two Holes in the 
 pofterior Part of each, dire6tly oppolite, and 
 in a ftrait Line with one another ; draw two 
 Wires through thefe Holes, and twifl: them 
 at fuch a Diftance in the Infide of the Skull, 
 as that it may be opened and fhut at Pleafure; 
 or you may fix a Brafs Hinge there, which 
 will appear more neat, and is fitter for the 
 Purpofe. In the anterior Part put through 
 the 7erebm between the Crifta and Exterior 
 Lamina 'j and in the Hole fix a Pin fomewhat 
 prominent to enter another oppofite Hole 
 made in the upper Part of the Skull. 
 
 Of 
 
268 The Method 
 
 Of the Articulattofi of /^^ LqweR 
 Jaw. 
 
 To join the lower Jaw, which finiflies the 
 Work, perforate the Condyloide Procefles, 
 then apply the Maxilla Inferior to the Head, 
 obferve what Places of the Skull are nearell: 
 the Hole both before and behind, perforate 
 thefe Places with a Fibula, fo as the Holes 
 may end in the Cavity of the Skull, then 
 draw a Wire through the Maxilla^ make its 
 two Extremities enter the Head thro' the a- 
 bovementioned two Holes, and there twift 
 them in the Inlide *. 
 
 The Bones of the Skeleton are all now 
 united, but there are other Bones ftill remain- 
 ing, as the OJJiculaAiiditus^ and Hyoides ^vf\nch. 
 have no Conne(ftion with the dry Bones^ 
 
 VffaliusSzy^, that this Joint is not ftrait enough far keep- 
 ing the Teeth together, and hindering the lower Jaw from 
 falling down ; he thinks it would appear much neater to 
 join this lower Jaw to the upper Os, fo as that they could be 
 opened and fhut at Pleafure ; therefore, befides the former 
 Joint, the acute Procefles of the Maxilla Inferior, (called 
 Corona) muft be perforated, and a fmall Cord faftened to 
 them, which muft pafs under the O^a Jugalia, and be 
 fupported by thefe Banes and the Vertex, and fo inclined ei- 
 ther towards the Fore or Hind-head, as that the Mouth may;, 
 »^vi or Ihut at Pleafure. 
 
 there-. 
 
of di[feBing B o B i"e S. ^69 
 therefore cannot properly be articulated with 
 the Skeleton *. 
 
 The Bones, by their own natural Weight, 
 incline downward, the Skeleton therefore 
 fliould have two Iron Supporters j one to 
 defcend through the Cavity of the Spine, and 
 the other faftened at its Apex in the Bafis of 
 the former, to enter the Lumbar Vertebrce, 
 The Form of which fee in Figure 9. 
 
 If you would have your Skeleton keep an 
 eredt Situation, you muft have an oblong 
 Cafe to preferve the Bones from Duft, and 
 the Injuries of the Air. Ered: in the Bottom^ 
 of this Cafe a perpendicular Iron Rod ; and, 
 to make it keep that Folition, iix it fecure- 
 ly with two Iron Pins to the Bottom 5 af- 
 terwards infert the Head of this Iron Rod be- 
 tween the Os Sacrum and the fifth Vertebra 
 of the Loins, and faflen to it the End of ano- 
 ther Iron Rod by two Fins. To this Rod 
 fix the Back and Neck, then fcrew on the 
 Head. Afterwards by proper Screws fix the 
 Feet to the Body, and fufpend the Arms at 
 the Scapula. 
 
 * Fahriclus, after having placed the OJJicula Auditus m 
 their natural Situation, puts them in a fmall VefTel, and that 
 Veffel into a Glafs, which he hung at the mammillary Pro- 
 cefs ; A very ftrange Fancy I think. 
 
 APPEN- 
 
270 The Method 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 To make an Infant Skeleton. 
 
 TO perforin this Operation, you need 
 only cut off the Head, and extrad: 
 the Brain, by thrufting up the Fo^ 
 ramen Magnum an Iron Rod or Wooden Pin, 
 then turning it from Side to Side to loofe and 
 extrad theBrain^ Vide Fig. 9. afterwards fill the 
 Skull with Water, and wafh it as if you were 
 cleaning a Bottle. The fpinal Marrow is ex- 
 tradied after the fame Manner by th.^ Foramina 
 of the Inferior Vertebrce. What remains is 
 the Body, and the like Method is ufed in 
 cleaning it as the Cartilages of the Sternum 
 of an Adult. The Fleih and the Mem- 
 branes muft be feparated from the Bones 
 with the utmoft care and caution that no 
 part be damnaged, or the Ligaments cut, 
 
 the 
 
of dljJ'eEimg Bodies. 271, 
 
 the Bones feparatedjOr the Cartilages deftroy- 
 ed. The Sternum is not to be cut from the 
 Ribs ; but the Arms and Legs may be cut ofF, 
 if you fee fit, becaufe they can be eafily re- 
 united without any confiderable Deformity. 
 
 Some ufe to dip the Bones often in boiling 
 Water while they are cleaning them 3 but I 
 have laid it down for a fixed Rule never to 
 boil, t>r put the Bones in boiling Water, but 
 only macerate them for three or four Days 
 in cold Water often changed, to foften the 
 Flefh, whereby it may be feparated with lefs 
 Trouble *. From hence you may eafily 
 make Skeletons of fuch fmall Animals, whofe 
 Bones will not admit the Perforation of a 
 Needle. Of this Kind are Rats, Mice, 
 Moles, Squirrels, and other living Creatures 
 of the fame Magnitude ; but the Bones of 
 Birds and Beafts of a larger Kind fhould be 
 joined with Wires. 
 
 * Columbus advlfes to boil the Bones ; for, fays he, if you 
 prepare an Infant Skeleton, take Care not to boil the Bones 
 for any confiderable Time, becaufe their Appendices will b* 
 «afily relaxed. 
 
 Cqrox.- 
 
17^ The M E t H 6 fi 
 
 Corollary. 
 
 Before an End is put to this Subjetfl, I 
 hiuft fubjoin, by way of Corollary, a fhort 
 and eafy Method of preparing of Skeletons, 
 iiril difcovered by Chance. 
 
 Shut up the Animal of your intended Ske- 
 leton in a Scatula^ and for the Suntimer put it 
 in a warm moiil Place to putrify, and as it 
 corrupts, it will produce a great Number of 
 Anhnalcida, which will devour the Flefh^ 
 and denudate the Bones. 
 
 Or you may lay your intended Skeleton 
 under the Rafters of a Houfe during the Sum- 
 mer Seafonj whence Worms will breed j 
 which will intirely confume the Flefh, and 
 leave only the bare Bones. 
 
 Mate 
 
JttheEn^ 
 
 Plate.m 
 
 Fi^.2. 
 
( ^73 
 
 PLATE I. Vide Pag. 6. 
 
 EXPLANATION. 
 
 t. r|pHE Myrtle Knife. 
 
 2. J. The Crooked Knife. 
 
 3. The Knife with a long Handle. 
 
 4. The Hook. 
 
 5. The Pipe to inflate the different Parts 
 of the Body. 
 
 6. The Round Edg'd Knife. 
 
 7. The Streight Edg'd Knife. 
 
 Plate IL 
 
 Figure Jifft, Is the Bafe of a Table, hav- 
 ing two Holes in it, thro' each of which 
 paffes a round Piece of V7ood fixed to the 
 Table. This Piece of Wood ihould, m its 
 lov/er Part, be made in the Form of a Pe- 
 T ritrcckciim^ 
 
274 '^^-'^ Plates explained, 
 ritrocheum, that a Screw may be fitted to it 
 by which the Table can be raifed or lower'd 
 at Pleafure, which fhould be alfo fiipported 
 with Planks for greater Security. 
 
 Figure fecond^ Shews the Surface of the 
 Table fixed on its Bafe by the Screw. 
 
 Figure thirds Vide Pag. 113. Lin. i. 
 
 a. A Bafe made of a thick Plank. 
 
 b. b. Two Columns of Wood. 
 
 c. A Hole in the Form of a Parallelo- 
 gram. 
 
 d. d. Square Pieces of Wood that pafs 
 thro' the Columns. 
 
 e. e. Two concave Pieces of Wood fixed 
 to the Columns to contain the Head. 
 
 f. A Peritrocheum. 
 
 g. A Screw, which being turned round, 
 bringrs the Columns fo near each other, as to 
 keep the Head faft. 
 
 Figure fourth^ Vide Pag, 115. Lift. 3. 
 
 a. A Bafe made of a very thick Plank. 
 
 b. b. Two Columns of Wood, one of 
 which is fixed. 
 
 c. The other, by turning the Screw, is 
 
 made 
 
The Plates explained. 2^5 
 
 made to approach or withdraw from the 
 former ; on which Account there is 
 
 J. A Bow fixed to them full of Holes, 
 that the Diftance between the Columns may 
 be regulated at Pleafure. 
 
 e. e. Two hollow Pieces of Wood fixed 
 to the Columns to contain the Head. 
 
 /. Where the two hollow Pieces of Wood 
 meet. 
 
 Figure ffth, a Perforator, 
 
 Figure Jixth^ a Radula. 
 
 Figure fe-venth, a Machine in which they 
 fix the Perforator, and pierce the Bones, by 
 turning it round. Vide Pag. 249. 
 
 a. The Bafis of the Machine, which the 
 Wedges b. b. pufh'd forward, hold fafl. 
 
 c, A Piece of Wood that may be turnedj 
 found, which in its Fore-part 
 
 d. Has a fquare Hole for the Terebra e. 
 to be put into. 
 
 /. A Bow with a Cord, that turns round 
 the Piece of Wood. 
 
 Figure 
 
Figure eighth, a twifled Wire; 
 
 Figure ninth, a Piece of Iron, which takes 
 Its Rifes from the Anus. The Length of it, 
 as far as the Curve, fhould reach to the 
 Feet, the Curve ought to enter the Lumbar 
 Vertebrie, whofe Breadth ought' to be fuch 
 as not to meet the other Piece of Iron there 
 concealed j then tlie Holes b, b. ought to be 
 joyned with the Holes c\ c. and below, for 
 Security, there fhould be a Plate of Iron 
 fixed by the Wedges a. a. to the Bafe. 
 
 b. Another Piece of Iron, which fliould 
 go along the Spine, and be as long as it, yet 
 ihould appear a little above the Head,' that 
 it may be fixed by the Screw d. 
 
 F J n I s. 
 
 kj^ 
 

 j'rrrSf'^CO jr/ 
 
 Oi 
 
 Y LIBRARIES 
 75 
 
 
.iii'**; i:'^'J'^vvrt<f!s5|